414
MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E SDH Long-Haul Microwave Radio Systems Operating Instructions Release 2.3 (RF/160 OI) Edition 12.2004

19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

radiorelee marconi8r

Citation preview

Page 1: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM ESDH Long-HaulMicrowave Radio Systems

Operating Instructions

Release 2.3

(RF/160 OI)Edition 12.2004

Page 2: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Marconi Communications GmbHD-71520 BacknangTelefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212http://www.marconi.comCopyright 2004 by Marconi Communications GmbH(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)Änderungen vorbehalten � Gedruckt in Deutschland

Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sindeingetragene Markenzeichenvon Marconi Communications GmbH.Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen derMicrosoft Corporation, Redmond.

Marconi Communications GmbHD-71520 BacknangTelephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212http://www.marconi.comCopyright 2004 by Marconi Communications GmbH(herein referred to as Marconi)Specifications subject to change � Printed in Germany

Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access aretrademarks ofMarconi Communications GmbH.Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,Redmond.

Page 3: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Contents

RF/160 OI I

Contents

1 Safety Instructions........................................................................1-11.1 Application............................................................................................................................ 1-11.2 Protection class ................................................................................................................... 1-11.3 Operating voltage................................................................................................................. 1-11.4 Rack installation................................................................................................................... 1-21.5 Rack grounding.................................................................................................................... 1-21.6 ESD protection ..................................................................................................................... 1-31.7 Laser safety .......................................................................................................................... 1-41.8 RF interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 1-6

2 Rack Configuration.......................................................................2-12.1 Channel positions ................................................................................................................ 2-62.2 Modem Unit addresses........................................................................................................ 2-92.3 RPSC addresses ................................................................................................................ 2-102.4 LON and CAN system bus ................................................................................................ 2-112.5 STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH) ....................................................................................... 2-13

3 Starting the Service PC ................................................................3-14 Configuration ................................................................................4-1

4.1 General settings ................................................................................................................... 4-24.1.1 Protection switching mode / Redundancy....................................................................... 4-24.1.2 XPIC................................................................................................................................ 4-24.1.3 ATPC .............................................................................................................................. 4-24.1.4 STM-1 processing........................................................................................................... 4-24.1.5 Protection switching........................................................................................................ 4-24.1.6 Auxiliary channels ........................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Transmitter (Tx).................................................................................................................... 4-34.3 Tx oscillator .......................................................................................................................... 4-74.4 Main receiver (Rx) ................................................................................................................ 4-84.5 Rx oscillator........................................................................................................................ 4-124.6 Diversity receiver (RxD) .................................................................................................... 4-13

4.6.1 Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations ......................................... 4-16

4.7 Modem Unit (MU)................................................................................................................ 4-174.7.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical .................................................................................................. 4-184.7.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical ...................................................................................................... 4-194.7.3 RPSI STM-1.................................................................................................................. 4-204.7.4 Modem Unit Power Supply ........................................................................................... 4-214.7.5 Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 4-224.7.6 Demodulator ................................................................................................................. 4-244.7.7 Controller module.......................................................................................................... 4-274.7.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 4-284.7.9 DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching ............................................................ 4-44

4.7.9.1 Line protection (n+1/2) .............................................................................................. 4-444.7.9.2 Equipment protection (1+1 HSB) .............................................................................. 4-48

4.8 RPSC + RPSH modules ..................................................................................................... 4-504.8.1 RPSC module ............................................................................................................... 4-504.8.2 RPSH module ............................................................................................................... 4-51

Page 4: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Contents Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIII

4.9 Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)......................................................................................... 4-524.9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-524.9.2 Service channels and connection options .................................................................... 4-534.9.3 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 4-564.9.4 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 4-57

4.9.4.1 RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm........................................................................... 4-644.9.4.2 RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm......................................................................... 4-65

4.9.5 EOW module................................................................................................................. 4-664.9.6 QTN module.................................................................................................................. 4-694.9.7 ECC Gateway module .................................................................................................. 4-734.9.8 ECC Gateway module - addresses .............................................................................. 4-75

4.9.8.1 Q3p operating mode ................................................................................................. 4-764.9.8.2 QD2-IP operating mode ............................................................................................ 4-804.9.8.3 QD2-SISA-V operating mode.................................................................................... 4-824.9.8.4 QD2-SISA-V-IP operating mode ............................................................................... 4-844.9.8.5 QD2-via-SISA-V operating modes ............................................................................ 4-86

4.9.9 ECC Gateway Module - IP Routing .............................................................................. 4-884.9.10 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 4-89

4.9.10.1 SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm.............................................................................. 4-1074.9.10.2 SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm............................................................................ 4-108

4.9.11 SOH Extension Module .............................................................................................. 4-1094.9.12 SISA-0/N ..................................................................................................................... 4-1154.9.13 SISA-K/R..................................................................................................................... 4-1164.9.14 XQI.............................................................................................................................. 4-123

5 Alignment ......................................................................................5-15.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-15.2 Display................................................................................................................................... 5-15.3 Overall alignment ................................................................................................................. 5-35.4 Checking alignment data..................................................................................................... 5-45.5 Selective alignment.............................................................................................................. 5-55.6 Hot Standby or 1+1 without occasional traffic.................................................................. 5-65.7 Alignment errors .................................................................................................................. 5-7

6 Alarms............................................................................................6-16.1 Standard module alarms ..................................................................................................... 6-16.2 Transmitter (Tx).................................................................................................................... 6-36.3 TX/RX oscillator.................................................................................................................... 6-46.4 Main receiver ........................................................................................................................ 6-56.5 Diversity receiver ................................................................................................................. 6-66.6 Modem Unit........................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.6.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical .................................................................................................... 6-76.6.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical ........................................................................................................ 6-76.6.3 RPSI STM-1.................................................................................................................... 6-96.6.4 Modem Unit power supply ............................................................................................ 6-106.6.5 Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 6-116.6.6 Demodulator ................................................................................................................. 6-126.6.7 Controller module.......................................................................................................... 6-146.6.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 6-15

6.7 RPSC + RPSH modules ..................................................................................................... 6-196.7.1 RPSC module ............................................................................................................... 6-196.7.2 RPSH module ............................................................................................................... 6-20

6.8 Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)......................................................................................... 6-216.8.1 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 6-21

Page 5: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Contents

RF/160 OI III

6.8.2 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 6-226.8.3 EOW module................................................................................................................. 6-306.8.4 QTN module.................................................................................................................. 6-316.8.5 ECC Gateway module .................................................................................................. 6-326.8.6 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 6-336.8.7 SOH Extension ............................................................................................................. 6-436.8.8 SISA-0/N ....................................................................................................................... 6-456.8.9 SISA-K/R....................................................................................................................... 6-466.8.10 XQI................................................................................................................................ 6-47

6.9 Alignment / OP/PR channel failure................................................................................... 6-48

7 Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters .......7-17.1 Overview of performance counters available ................................................................... 7-17.2 Transmitter ........................................................................................................................... 7-27.3 Main receiver ........................................................................................................................ 7-47.4 Diversity receiver ................................................................................................................. 7-67.5 Modem Unit........................................................................................................................... 7-7

7.5.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical .................................................................................................... 7-77.5.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical ...................................................................................................... 7-107.5.3 RPSI STM-1.................................................................................................................. 7-137.5.4 Modem Unit power supply ............................................................................................ 7-167.5.5 Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 7-177.5.6 Demodulator ................................................................................................................. 7-187.5.7 Controller module.......................................................................................................... 7-197.5.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 7-20

7.6 RPSC + RPSH module ....................................................................................................... 7-337.7 OHAU Overhead Access Unit ........................................................................................... 7-34

7.7.1 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 7-347.7.2 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 7-357.7.3 EOW module................................................................................................................. 7-367.7.4 QTN module.................................................................................................................. 7-377.7.5 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 7-387.7.6 SOH Extension module ................................................................................................ 7-397.7.7 SISA-0/N module .......................................................................................................... 7-407.7.8 SISA-K/R....................................................................................................................... 7-417.7.9 XQI................................................................................................................................ 7-42

8 Software, Equipment and Configuration Management ..............8-18.1 Required operator software ................................................................................................ 8-18.2 Software download to system modules ............................................................................ 8-18.3 OSI parameter file transfer to the ECC Gateway Module................................................. 8-18.4 OSI parameter upload from the ECC Gateway module.................................................... 8-28.5 Saving and loading equipment configuration data .......................................................... 8-28.6 Creating a system data table .............................................................................................. 8-38.7 Adjusting the system time .................................................................................................. 8-3

9 What is when? Troubleshooting.................................................9-19.1 Module replacement ............................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1.1 Safety instructions........................................................................................................... 9-19.1.2 Module replacement - effects on the STM-1 signal ........................................................ 9-1

9.2 Replacing modules .............................................................................................................. 9-29.2.1 Transmitter TX ................................................................................................................ 9-29.2.2 Receiver RX.................................................................................................................... 9-39.2.3 RPS-C............................................................................................................................. 9-4

Page 6: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Contents Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIIV

9.2.4 RPS-H............................................................................................................................. 9-49.2.5 Modem Unit..................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.2.5.1 SPI STM-1 electrical.................................................................................................... 9-59.2.5.2 SPI STM-1 optical ....................................................................................................... 9-69.2.5.3 RPSI STM-1 ................................................................................................................ 9-69.2.5.4 Modem Unit Power Supply.......................................................................................... 9-69.2.5.5 Modulator / Demodulator............................................................................................. 9-79.2.5.6 Controller..................................................................................................................... 9-79.2.5.7 DPU/RPS STM-1......................................................................................................... 9-8

9.2.6 OHAU.............................................................................................................................. 9-99.2.6.1 OHAU Power Supply................................................................................................... 9-99.2.6.2 RFCOH EAST / WEST.............................................................................................. 9-109.2.6.3 EOW.......................................................................................................................... 9-109.2.6.4 QTN........................................................................................................................... 9-109.2.6.5 SISA-K/R ................................................................................................................... 9-119.2.6.6 ECC Gateway............................................................................................................ 9-119.2.6.7 SOH Access / SOH Extension .................................................................................. 9-119.2.6.8 SISA-0/N ................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.3 RF Unit ................................................................................................................................ 9-139.4 Modem Unit......................................................................................................................... 9-149.5 RPS...................................................................................................................................... 9-189.6 OHA Unit ............................................................................................................................. 9-18

9.6.1 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 9-189.6.2 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 9-199.6.3 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 9-219.6.4 SOH Extension Module ................................................................................................ 9-259.6.5 SISA0/N ........................................................................................................................ 9-279.6.6 EOW and QTN.............................................................................................................. 9-28

10 Subracks and Modules ...............................................................10-110.1 Transmitter (Tx).................................................................................................................. 10-110.2 Main and diversity receiver (Rx / RxD)............................................................................. 10-210.3 RPS-C .................................................................................................................................. 10-310.4 RPS-H .................................................................................................................................. 10-410.5 Modem Unit......................................................................................................................... 10-510.6 OHAU subrack.................................................................................................................... 10-6

10.6.1 OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module) ................................................ 10-610.6.2 OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)................................................. 10-7

11 Channel Patterns ........................................................................11-111.1 Channel patterns of the 4 GHz RF band .......................................................................... 11-111.2 Channel patterns of the 5 GHz RF band .......................................................................... 11-711.3 Channel patterns of the L6 RF band ................................................................................ 11-911.4 Channel patters of the U6 RF band ................................................................................ 11-1111.5 Channel patterns of the 7 GHz RF band ........................................................................ 11-1211.6 Channel patterns of the 8 GHz RF band ........................................................................ 11-1511.7 Channel patterns of the 13 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 11-18

12 Frequency Setting.......................................................................12-112.1 Frequency setting in the 3.6 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-112.2 Frequency setting in the 3.9 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-212.3 Frequency setting in the 4.7 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-4

Page 7: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Contents

RF/160 OI V

12.4 Frequency setting in the 6.2 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-512.5 Frequency setting in the 6.8 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-612.6 Frequency setting in the 7 GHz RF band......................................................................... 12-712.7 Frequency setting in the 8 GHz RF band......................................................................... 12-812.8 Frequency setting in the 13 GHz RF band....................................................................... 12-9

13 Connectors..................................................................................13-113.1 Connectors of the transmitter (Tx)................................................................................... 13-213.2 Connectors of the main and diversity receiver (Rx and RxD)....................................... 13-413.3 Connectors of the Modem Unit......................................................................................... 13-7

13.3.1 Connectors of the SPI El. and SPI Opt. module......................................................... 13-14

13.4 Connectors of the Overhead Access Unit ..................................................................... 13-1513.4.1 Connectors of SISA- 0/N and Q modules................................................................... 13-38

13.5 Connectors of RPS-C and RPS-H modules................................................................... 13-39

14 Ordering Information ..................................................................14-114.1 CE compliance ................................................................................................................... 14-114.2 Ordering information ......................................................................................................... 14-1

15 After-Sales Service .....................................................................15-116 Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module.......................16-117 Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model......................17-1

17.1 QD2 view ............................................................................................................................. 17-117.2 Functional groups supported ........................................................................................... 17-217.3 Assignment of instances to microwave radio channels................................................ 17-217.4 SISA0 functional group ..................................................................................................... 17-3

17.4.1 Application functions..................................................................................................... 17-317.4.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-3

17.5 RTF-1 functional group ..................................................................................................... 17-417.5.1 Application functions..................................................................................................... 17-417.5.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-417.5.3 Configuration................................................................................................................. 17-517.5.4 Performance measuring points..................................................................................... 17-517.5.5 User data ...................................................................................................................... 17-5

17.6 RTFE-1 functional group ................................................................................................... 17-617.6.1 Application functions..................................................................................................... 17-617.6.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-617.6.3 Configuration................................................................................................................. 17-717.6.4 Performance measuring points..................................................................................... 17-717.6.5 User data ...................................................................................................................... 17-7

17.7 RRTF-1 functional group................................................................................................... 17-817.7.1 Application functions..................................................................................................... 17-817.7.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-817.7.3 Configuration................................................................................................................. 17-917.7.4 Performance measuring points..................................................................................... 17-917.7.5 User data ...................................................................................................................... 17-9

17.8 RX functional group......................................................................................................... 17-1017.8.1 Application functions................................................................................................... 17-1017.8.2 Alarm information........................................................................................................ 17-1017.8.3 Configuration............................................................................................................... 17-1117.8.4 Measuring values........................................................................................................ 17-11

Page 8: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Contents Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIVI

17.9 RX functional group for hot standby configurations ................................................... 17-1217.9.1 Application functions................................................................................................... 17-1217.9.2 Alarm information........................................................................................................ 17-1217.9.3 Configuration............................................................................................................... 17-1317.9.4 Measuring values........................................................................................................ 17-13

17.10 TX functional group ......................................................................................................... 17-1417.10.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-1417.10.2 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-1417.10.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-1517.10.4 Measuring values .................................................................................................... 17-15

17.11 TX functional group for equipment protection (hot standby) ..................................... 17-1617.11.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-1617.11.2 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-1617.11.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-1717.11.4 Measuring values .................................................................................................... 17-17

17.12 PSU functional group ...................................................................................................... 17-1817.12.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-1817.12.2 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-1817.12.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-1917.12.4 Performance measuring points ............................................................................... 17-19

17.13 SCU functional group ...................................................................................................... 17-2017.13.1 Mapping service channels onto SCU instances and channels ............................... 17-2017.13.2 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-2117.13.3 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-2117.13.4 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-21

17.14 ME functional group ........................................................................................................ 17-2217.14.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-2217.14.2 General.................................................................................................................... 17-22

18 Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC ...............................18-118.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 18-118.2 Functioning of a CCDP system ........................................................................................ 18-118.3 Behaviour in case of radio hop failures........................................................................... 18-118.4 Behaviour in case of equipment failures......................................................................... 18-2

18.4.1 Tx-side failure ............................................................................................................... 18-218.4.2 Rx-side failure ............................................................................................................... 18-318.4.3 Failure of the ATPC control channel............................................................................. 18-4

Page 9: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Figures

RF/160 OI VII

FiguresFig. 1-1: DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male .......................................................................................... 1-1Fig. 1-2: Rack installation............................................................................................................. 1-2Fig. 1-3: Protective grounding point ........................................................................................... 1-2Fig. 1-4: Bracelet contacts ........................................................................................................... 1-3Fig. 1-5: Laser warning label........................................................................................................ 1-4Fig. 1-6: Optical interface module SPI ........................................................................................ 1-5Fig. 1-7: RF interfaces .................................................................................................................. 1-6Fig. 2-1: Card slots in the system rack ....................................................................................... 2-1Fig. 2-2: Channel positions for n+0............................................................................................. 2-6Fig. 2-3: Channel positions for n+0 with XPIC ........................................................................... 2-6Fig. 2-4: Channel positions for n+1............................................................................................. 2-7Fig. 2-5: Channel positions for n+1 with XPIC ........................................................................... 2-7Fig. 2-6: Channel positions - type A for n+2 with XPIC............................................................. 2-8Fig. 2-7: Channel positions - type B for n+2 with XPIC............................................................. 2-8Fig. 2-8: LON bus 6+2 XPIC........................................................................................................ 2-11Fig. 2-9: LON bus 14+2 XPIC...................................................................................................... 2-11Fig. 2-10: CAN bus 6+2 XPIC ....................................................................................................... 2-12Fig. 2-11: CAN bus 14+2 XPIC ..................................................................................................... 2-12Fig. 2-12: SOH ............................................................................................................................... 2-13Fig. 2-13: Utilization of media-specific SOH bytes .................................................................... 2-14Fig. 4-1: DPU/RPS STM-1 front panel........................................................................................ 4-44Fig. 4-2: Locking of PR1............................................................................................................. 4-46Fig. 4-3: Switching from OP1 to PR2 ........................................................................................ 4-47Fig. 4-4: Switching Tx1 to the antenna ..................................................................................... 4-48Fig. 4-5: Switching Tx2 to the antenna ..................................................................................... 4-49Fig. 4-6: Service channels in the OHAU ................................................................................... 4-52Fig. 4-7: RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm............................................................................. 4-64Fig. 4-8: RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm........................................................................... 4-65Fig. 4-9: SOH Access Module Interface 75 Ohm.................................................................... 4-107Fig. 4-10: SOH Access Module Interface 120 Ohm.................................................................. 4-108Fig. 10-1: Transmitter (Tx)............................................................................................................ 10-1Fig. 10-2: Main and diversity receiver (Rx/RxD)......................................................................... 10-2Fig. 10-3: RPS-C ............................................................................................................................ 10-3Fig. 10-4: RPS-H ............................................................................................................................ 10-4Fig. 10-5: MU subrack................................................................................................................... 10-5Fig. 10-6: OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module)............................................. 10-6Fig. 10-7: OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)............................................. 10-7Fig. 11-1: ITU-R F.382 ................................................................................................................... 11-1Fig. 11-2: ITU-R F.382 China ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Page 10: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Figures Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIVIII

Fig. 11-3: ITU-R F.382 (OIRT) ....................................................................................................... 11-3Fig. 11-4: ITU-R F.497 sim. Russia .............................................................................................. 11-4Fig. 11-5: ITU-R F.635 A1.............................................................................................................. 11-5Fig. 11-6: ITU-R F.635 A1 5a sim. ................................................................................................ 11-6Fig. 11-7: ITU-R F.1099 A1............................................................................................................ 11-7Fig. 11-8: ITU-R F.1099 A1 3 sim. ................................................................................................ 11-8Fig. 11-9: ITU-R F.497 Russia....................................................................................................... 11-9Fig. 11-10: ITU-R F.383 ................................................................................................................. 11-10Fig. 11-11: ITU-R F.384 ................................................................................................................. 11-11Fig. 11-12: ITU-R F. 385 A1 + alt. ................................................................................................. 11-12Fig. 11-13: ITU-R F.385 A3............................................................................................................ 11-13Fig. 11-14: ITU-R F.385 A4............................................................................................................ 11-14Fig. 11-15: ITU-R F.386 A1............................................................................................................ 11-15Fig. 11-16: ITU-R F.386 A3 sim..................................................................................................... 11-16Fig. 11-17: ITU-R F.386 A4............................................................................................................ 11-17Fig. 11-18: ITU-R F.497 ................................................................................................................. 11-18Fig. 13-1: OHAU block diagram ................................................................................................. 13-15Fig. 17-1: QD2 view of a microwave radio terminal (left) or regenerator station (right) ........ 17-1Fig. 17-2: MDRS 155 E-2+0(left) and 1+1conf. with occasional traffic (right) ......................... 17-1Fig. 18-1: Block diagram of a CCDP system .............................................................................. 18-1Fig. 18-2: Equipment failure on the transmit side (V) ............................................................... 18-2Fig. 18-3: Equipment failure on the receive side (V) ................................................................. 18-3

Page 11: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Key Words

RF/160 OI IX

Key words

Key word 2-1: Setting Modem Unit addresses............................................................................ 2-9Key word 2-2: Setting RPSC addresses..................................................................................... 2-10Key word 4-1: Activating the Tx XPIC .......................................................................................... 4-4Key word 4-2: Adjusting the Tx power......................................................................................... 4-4Key word 4-3: Activating the ATPC Tx........................................................................................ 4-4Key word 4-4: Adjusting the Tx ATPC holding time ................................................................... 4-5Key word 4-5: RF band position – Tx ........................................................................................... 4-6Key word 4-6: Requesting the Tx oscillator frequency .............................................................. 4-7Key word 4-7: Activating the Rx XPIC.......................................................................................... 4-9Key word 4-8: Activating the Rx ATPC ........................................................................................ 4-9Key word 4-9: Adjusting the Rx ATPC reference level............................................................. 4-10Key word 4-10: Adjusting the Rx ATPC holding time................................................................. 4-10Key word 4-11: RF band position - Rx ......................................................................................... 4-11Key word 4-12: Requesting the Rx oscillator frequency............................................................ 4-12Key word 4-13: Adjusting the RxD modulation........................................................................... 4-14Key word 4-14: Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations.......................... 4-16Key word 4-15: Activating the MD XPIC....................................................................................... 4-22Key word 4-16: Unmodulated IF carrier ....................................................................................... 4-22Key word 4-17: Activating the DM XPIC....................................................................................... 4-24Key word 4-18: Adjusting the DM group delay equalizer........................................................... 4-24Key word 4-19: Defining the OP and PR channel no. ................................................................. 4-28Key word 4-20: BB/IF Loopback ................................................................................................... 4-30Key word 4-21: Switching thresholds .......................................................................................... 4-32Key word 4-22: HSB equipment protection ................................................................................. 4-35Key word 4-23: Radio hop identifier............................................................................................. 4-38Key word 4-24: SOH processing................................................................................................... 4-39Key word 4-25: Activating the service channel........................................................................... 4-41Key word 4-26: Manual protection switching.............................................................................. 4-44Key word 4-27: Selecting RFCOH with 4x64 k............................................................................. 4-58Key word 4-28: DSC1 assignment in the RFCOH: EOW, QTN or External ............................... 4-58Key word 4-29: Defining the RFCOH 4x64 k protection switching option ............................... 4-59Key word 4-30: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 4x64 k ................................................ 4-59Key word 4-31: Selecting RFCOH with 8x64 k............................................................................. 4-60Key word 4-32: Defining protection switching options for RFCOH 8x64 k .............................. 4-60Key word 4-33: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 8x64 k ................................................ 4-61Key word 4-34: Activating the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH......................................................... 4-62Key word 4-35: Defining the 2048 k WSC protection switching option in the RFCOH ........... 4-62Key word 4-36: Selecting the alarm display of the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH ....................... 4-63Key word 4-37: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm ....................................................... 4-64

Page 12: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Key Words Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIX

Key word 4-38: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm ..................................................... 4-65Key word 4-39: Selecting 2/6-wire PSTN inteface of the EOW .................................................. 4-66Key word 4-40: Transmitting or blocking the EOW .................................................................... 4-67Key word 4-41: Defining the clock source of the EOW .............................................................. 4-67Key word 4-42: Defining the level of the PSTN port ................................................................... 4-68Key word 4-43: Selecting the clock source for EOW branching ............................................... 4-68Key word 4-44: Configuring QD2/SISA-K..................................................................................... 4-69Key word 4-45: Selecting the 64-k transmission channel for the Q-signal .............................. 4-72Key word 4-46: Configuring the ECC Gateway Module.............................................................. 4-73Key word 4-47: Selecting the 2048 k WSC interface in the SOH ............................................... 4-90Key word 4-48: DPU STM-1 address ............................................................................................ 4-90Key word 4-49: Selecting 4x64k service channels West in the SOH ........................................ 4-91Key word 4-50: Selecting RPS options for 4x64 k West in the SOH ......................................... 4-91Key word 4-51: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k West in the SOH ................................. 4-92Key word 4-52: Selecting 4x64k service channels East in the SOH ......................................... 4-93Key word 4-53: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k East in the SOH .................................. 4-94Key word 4-54: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH................................ 4-95Key word 4-55: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH........................ 4-96Key word 4-56: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH................................. 4-97Key word 4-57: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH......................... 4-98Key word 4-58: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH ..................................... 4-99Key word 4-59: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH ........... 4-99Key word 4-60: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH . 4-100Key word 4-61: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .................................... 4-101Key word 4-62: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .......... 4-101Key word 4-63: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .. 4-102Key word 4-64: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH .................................. 4-103Key word 4-65: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH ......... 4-103Key word 4-66: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH . 4-104Key word 4-67: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH .................................... 4-105Key word 4-68: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH .......... 4-105Key word 4-69: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH .. 4-106Key word 4-70: Setting SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm .......................................................... 4-107Key word 4-71: Setting SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm ........................................................ 4-108Key word 4-72: Occupying 64-k service channel D1 West in the SOH................................... 4-109Key word 4-73: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel West in the SOH .............. 4-110Key word 4-74: Selecting the alarm display for DCC service channel West in the SOH ...... 4-110Key word 4-75: Occupying the DCC service channel East in the SOH .................................. 4-111Key word 4-76: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel East in the SOH ............... 4-112Key word 4-77: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH ................................... 4-113Key word 4-78: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH ......... 4-113

Page 13: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Key Words

RF/160-B XI

Key word 4-79: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH . 4-113Key word 4-80: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH .................................... 4-114Key word 4-81: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH .......... 4-114Key word 4-82: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k serv. channel E2 West in the SOH ..... 4-114Key word 13-1: Rx/RxD recorder port .......................................................................................... 13-4

Note:Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do not belong to the normaldelivery scope and have to be explicitly ordered.Modifications of technical contents and characteristics reserved.

Page 14: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Key Words Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIXII

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 15: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Abbreviations

RF/160 OI XIII

Abbreviations

A ACAP Adjacent-Channel Alternate-Polarized (corresponds to ACDP mode)ACDP Adjacent Channel Dual-Polarized (corresponds to ACAP mode)ADR AddressAIS Alarm Indication SignalATDE Adaptive Time Domain EqualizerATN Analog Terminal NetworkATPC Automatic Transmit Power ControlAU-AIS Administrative Unit AIS

B BAT Battery Input (DC)BB BasebandBER Bit Error Ratio

C CALL CallCAN Controller Area NetworkCBN Channel Branching NetworkCCDP Co-Channel Dual-PolarizedCL ClockCP Connection PanelCR Clock ReferenceCRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

D DCC Data Communication ChannelDCCR DCC of the RSOHDCCM DCC of the MSOHDFM Dispersive Fading MarginDIPL DiplexerDIV DiversityDK Service ChannelDM DemodulatorDPU Data Processing UnitDRS Digital Microwave Radio SystemDSC Digital Service ChannelDTMF Dual Tone Multiple FrequencyDTN Digital Terminal Network

E EA PS Equipment Alarm PSEA RU Equipment Alarm RUEA Rx Equipment Alarm RxEA Tx Equipment Alarm TxECC Embedded Control ChannelsEMC Electromagnetic CompatibilityEMI Electromagnetic InterferenceEOW Engineer OrderwireESD Electrostatic DischargeEXATN Extension Analog Termination NetworkEXT SET Extended Handset

F FD Frequency DiversityFEC Forward Error CorrectionFP Fuse Panel

H HF High FrequencyHSB Hot Standby

I IF Intermediate FrequencyIM Interface ModuleINT-A Internal Trouble of the module - Major alarmINT-B Internal Trouble of the module - Minor alarm

L LA Rx Line Alarm RxLA Tx Line Alarm TxLA/EA Rx Line and Equipment Alarm RxLA-Tx-BIT Line Alarm - Tx Bit

Page 16: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Abbreviations Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIXIV

LMT Local Maintenance TerminalLOF Loss Of FrameLON Local Operator NetworkLOP Loss Of PointerLOS Loss Of SignalLSS Loss Of Sequence Synchronization

M MAINS Mains PowerMAP Mapping FunctionMD ModulatorMLQAM Multilevel Quadrature Amplitude ModulationMS-AIS Multiplex Section AISMSOH Multiplex Section OverheadMSP Multiplex Section ProtectionMST Multiplex Section TerminationMU Modem Unit

N NC Normally ClosedNE Network ElementNFD Net Filter DiscriminationNO Normally Open

O O&M Operation and MaintenanceOH OverheadOHA Overhead AccessOOF Out Of FrameOP Operating ChannelOSC OscillatorOT Occasional Traffic

P PCB Printed Circuit BoardPDH Plesiochronous Digital HierarchyPI Physical InterfacePOWER PowerPR Protection ChannelPS Power SupplyPSTN Public Subscriber Terminal NetworkPSU Protection Switching Unit

Q QAM Quadrature Amplitude ModulationQMP Performance Measuring Point

R RBER Residual Bit Error RatioRC Remote ControlRDI Remote Defect IndicationREI Remote Error IndicationRF Radio FrequencyRFCOH Radio Frame Complementary OverheadROW Regenerator Order WireRPS Radio Protection SwitchingRPSC Radio Protection Switching Central UnitRPSI Radio Protection Switching InterfaceRRR Radio Relay RegeneratorRRTF Radio Regenerator Transport FunctionRRTR Radio Relay TerminalRSL Receiver Signal LevelRSOH Regenerator Section OverheadRST Regenerator Section TerminationRTF Regenerator Transport FunctionRTFE Regenerator Transport Function ElectricalRTTF Radio Terminal Transport FunctionRU Radio UnitRx ReceiverRxD Diversity Receiver

S SAW Surface Acoustic Wave

Page 17: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Abbreviations

RF/160 OI XV

SCU Service Channel UnitSD Space DiversitySDH Synchronous Digital HierarchySNCP Sub-Network Connection ProtectionSNMP Simple Network Management ProtocolSOA ServiceOn AccessSOH Section OverheadSOHA Section Overhead AccessSOL Start Of Life valueSPB Synchronous Port BlockSPI Synchronous Port InterfaceSPI EL Synchronous Port Interface - ElectricalSPI OPT Synchronous Port Interface - OpticalSTM Synchronous Transport Module

T T3 Clock Input 2048 kTIM Trace Identifier MismatchTMN Telecommunication Management NetworkTSE Test Sequence ErrorTTF Terminal Transport FunctionTx Transmitter

U USER User PortW WAY Wayside TrafficX XIF Cross-Polarization Improvement Factor

XPD Cross-Polarization DecouplingXPE Cross-Polarization EqualizerXPI Cross-Polarization InterferenceXPIC Cross-Polarization Interference Canceller

Page 18: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Abbreviations Operating Instructions

RF/160 OIXVI

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 19: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Safety Instructions

RF/160 OI 1-1

1 Safety Instructions1.1 Application

These microwave radio systems are designed to meet environment class 3.2 as defined in ETS 300 019.This class specifies system applications in partly temperature-controlled rooms (-5 °C to +45 °C, max.95% relative humidity). The systems may be used only under the conditions and for the purpose for whichthey have been developed. For more detailed information, please refer to the “Technical characteristics“indicated in the Operator Manual.Installation and Service works may be executed only by technically trained and experienced staff knowingthe hazards that can occur and the measures to be taken for minimizing any danger for themselves andthird parties.� Please note all warnings and instructions contained in this Manual.� Only service staff should be granted access to the active system.� Do not use any installation materials (screws, nuts etc.) different from those supplied with the

equipment or recommended by the manufacturer.� Use appropriate safety devices while you are working on top of or near the mast.� The system may be installed and operated only in locations with restricted access.

1.2 Protection class

The DRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E system meets protection class IEC IP 20.

1.3 Operating voltage

The Tx, Rx, MU PS and OHAU PS modules of the microwave radio system can be operated in thevoltage range from 19 V to 75 V DC. The voltage input is floating, i.e. either the positive pole (standard)or the negative pole can be grounded. The standard cables used for setting up the connection to thepower box (distributor) are dimensioned for the voltage ranges of 48 V and 60 V.Thicker cable cross-sections are required for 24 V.

Before switching on the power supply, please check that the operating voltage and supply voltageare identical and that the polarity is correct (Fig. 1-1).

Fig. 1-1: DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male

Ensure that the power supply has been switched off before you plug in or pull out any moduleconnecting cables. This applies to both control and operating voltage cables of the Modem Unit,OHAU as well as Tx and Rx modules.If the RPSI module is pulled out or plugged in live, transmission faults may occur in the protection channel.Ensure that the following conditions are fullfilled:

1. No operating channel must be protection-switched.2. The protection switching function must have been enabled or3. the links between the corresponding RPSI and RPS-C modules must have been cut.

The following modules may be inserted in or extracted from the subrack only with the power supplyswitched off:

Modulator = Mod/MD (in Modem Unit)Demodulator = Demod/DM (in Modem Unit)SOH Access (in OHAU)Power Supply = PS (in OHAU & Modem Unit)

BAT 19...75 V DC

- +

Page 20: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Safety Instructions Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI1-2

For safety reasons, we always recommend to switch off the corresponding power supply unit at thefuse panel before you extract or insert a module!The automatic circuit breakers must be located in the feeder line of the ungrounded pole.With the standard fuse sockets of Power Box II, the system may be operated only usingbatteries with the positive pole grounded.

1.4 Rack installation

The system racks (ETSI or 19“) must be protected from tipping over by screwing the clips (Fig. 1-2) to thewall or ceiling using appropriate securing material. For more detailed information, please refer to theInstallation Manual.

Fig. 1-2: Rack installation

1.5 Rack grounding

The racks must be grounded at the protective grounding point located in the top section of the rear rackupright (Fig. 1-3) using a protective conductor (16 mm²). The individual modules are grounded via themetal rails of the subracks and rack. For further instructions, please refer to the Installation Manual.

Fig. 1-3: Protective grounding point

M8

Page 21: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Safety Instructions

RF/160 OI 1-3

1.6 ESD protection

The system rack is equipped with two grounding points (Fig. 1-4) with a 10 mm snap fastener forconnecting a grounding bracelet. By grounding the wrist, it is possible to avoid electrostatic dischargesthat could destroy sensitive electronic components when touching the modules.

Fig. 1-4: Bracelet contacts

E arthB ondingP oint

E arthB ondingP oint

E arthB ondingP oint

10 mm

Page 22: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Safety Instructions Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI1-4

1.7 Laser safety

The Modem Unit can be optionally equipped with two optical modules (SPI) (Fig. 1-6).

The laser used meets LASER CLASS 1 (Fig. 1-5) as defined by EN 60825-1.

Fig. 1-5: Laser warning label

The laser complies with ITU-T G.957 and features the following characteristics:

S-1.1 L-1.1Wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nmOutput power -8...-15 dBm 0...-5 dBmPulse duration 6.43 ns 6.43 nsBeam divergence approx. 23° approx. 23°

The module is automatically deactivated by an ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) circuit as soon as theoptical input signal fails (e.g. in case of a cable break). In case of a loss of signal of the SPI, the laser isalternately activated for 2 seconds and deactivated for 70 seconds. Besides this automatic testing routine,it is also possible to switch on the laser manually for 2 seconds or 90 seconds. After expiry of thecorresponding period, the system returns to the previous testing cycle.

Maintenance and repair works must be executed by qualified service personnel.

The laser source emits invisible laser radiation. Laser beams may lead to irreparable eye injuries.Never look into the laser source or onto the connector surface of FO cables connected, not even withoptical instruments.

� CAUTION!Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein mayresult in hazardous radiation exposure.

Page 23: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Safety Instructions

RF/160 OI 1-5

Fig. 1-6: Optical interface module SPI

BOSCH RPSC

E arthB ondingP oint

E arthB ondingP oint

STM-1

SPI

Page 24: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Safety Instructions Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI1-6

1.8 RF interfaces

When opening the RF interfaces (waveguides or semi-rigid cables) while the transmitters are active,microwave radiation is emitted which may lead to health hazards.In addition, this can lead to RF interferences in neighbouring units.Do not look into open waveguide connections and do not stand in front of transmit antennas.

Fig. 1-7: RF interfaces

The SMA connectors of the coaxial cables between the Tx modules, Rx modules and channelbranching networks may only be tightened with a torque of approx. 60 Ncm. A higher torque wouldslacken the SMA connectors at the RF filters when opening the joint. This would lead to a change of the filter characteristic.

Warning : Do not open waveguide joints withoutswitching off the transmitter. Stray RF poweris harmful to the body (particulary to the eyes)and can also cause RF interference.

Warnung : Nicht die Hohlleiterverbindungen öffnen bevor die Sender ausgeschaltet sind. Mikrowellenstrahlung kann gesundheitsschädlich sein, besonders für die Augen.Ebenso können Gerätestörungen verursacht werden.

Page 25: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-1

2 Rack Configuration

The card slots for the individual modules are numbered in the system racks 0, 1...4.The modules to be mounted in these card slots are preconfigured in the factory to the customer-specificrequirements.On site, the modules must be installed in the corresponding card slots in accordance with theconfiguration lists included in the delivery scope to ensure that all functions adjusted are correctly fulfilled.

Fig. 2-1: Card slots in the system rack

101 102 103 104111 112 113 114

100

200220 215214213212 216222

207 208

305

209201

210 211205204203202 206

300301 302 303 304311 312 313 314

401402

405

404

403

406

409

408

407

410

411

412413

414

501502

505

504

503

506

509

508

507

510

511

512513

514500

400

001 - 004005 - 008

000

011

010

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

0210

20

019

221

Page 26: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-2

Rack 1...4Card slot

Ident no. Designation Filter type Manufact. no.

001...004 ETSI rack005...008 ETSI adaption set

100 Rx cabinet101...104 Rx / RxD111...114 Oscillator

200 Branching cabinet220 Cover branching221 Flexible coaxial cable222 Flexible coaxial cable, div.201 RF connecting unit202 RF filter Tx203 RF filter Tx

Termination204 RF filter Tx

TerminationWaveguide

205 RF filter TxTerminationWaveguide

206 TerminationWaveguide

207 RF filter Rx208 RF filter Rx

Termination209 RF filter Rx

TerminationWaveguide

210 RF filter RxTerminationWaveguide

211 TerminationWaveguide

212 RF filter RxD213 RF filter RxD

Termination214 RF filter RxD

TerminationWaveguide

215 RF filter RxDTerminationWaveguide

216 TerminationWaveguide

Page 27: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-3

Rack 1...4Card slot

Ident no. Designation Filter type Manufact. no.

300 Tx cabinet301...302 Tx311...314 Oscillator

305 Rack fan400 Subrack modem unit401 Cover RPSI

RPSI402 SPI electrical interface

SPI optical interface403 Modem unit power supply404 Modulator405 DPU/RPS STM-1406 Controller module407 Demodulator408 Demodulator409 DPU/RPS STM-1410 Modulator411 Modem unit power supply412 Cover RPSI

RPSI413 SPI electrical interface

SPI optical interface414 Cover RPSC

RPSCRPSH

500 Subrack modem unit501 Cover RPSI

RPSI502 SPI electrical interface

SPI optical interface503 Modem unit power supply504 Modulator505 DPU/RPS STM-1506 Controller module507 Demodulator508 Demodulator509 DPU/RPS STM-1510 Modulator511 Modem unit power supply

Page 28: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-4

Rack 0Card slot

Ident no. Designation Filtertype

Manufact. no.

512 Cover RPSIRPSI

513 SPI electrical interfaceSPI optical interface

514 Cover RPSCRPSCRPSH

Rack 0Card slot

Ident no. Designation Filtertype

Manufact. no.

000 ETSI rack infrastucture010 Subrack OHA unit011 Cover CP OHAU

Handset OHAU012 OHAU power supply013 Cover RFCOH access mod.

RFCOH Access Module014 Cover RFCOH access mod.

RFCOH Access Module015 Cover Q-interface module

QD2 interface module016 Cover EOW module

EOW module017 Cover EOW module

EOW module018 SOH Access Module019 Cover SOH ext. module

SOH extension module020 Cover SISA

SISA-0/N021 Cover CP OHAU

Handset OHAU

Page 29: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-5

Rack 1...4

Filter frequenciesExample:

MHz MHz MHz MHz RxD

207 f1 7498 MHz 207 f2 7554 MHz MHz MHz Rx

202 f1 7652 MHz 202 f2 7708 MHz MHz MHz Tx

Altitude:..... [m] above sea level

f1 f2 f1f1

Type A Type B

f1 f2

With 64 MLQAM, two adjacent RF channels (e.g. ch. 1 and ch. 2) can be tuned in an RF diplexer.With 128 MLQAM, two RF channels separated by another channel (e.g. ch. 1 and ch. 3) can be tuned inan RF diplexer.If - with 128 MLQAM - two adjacent channels (e.g. 1 and 2) are used, two separate RF filters must beprovided.With 64 MLQAM, the position of each Tx filter and its far-end Rx filter in the channel branching network isfreely selectable.With 128 MLQAM, the position of each Tx filter and its far-end Rx filter in the channel branching networkis not freely selectable. The arrangement of Rx filters in the Rx section must be reversed compared to thearrangement of Tx filters in the Tx section.

Page 30: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-6

2.1 Channel positions

Fig. 2-2: Channel positions for n+0

Fig. 2-3: Channel positions for n+0 with XPIC

OP2OP1 OP3 OP4

OP2

OP3

OP1

OP4

OP6OP5 OP7 OP8

OP6

OP7

OP5

OP8

OP3OP1 OP5 OP7

OP2

OP5

OP1

OP6

OP11OP9 OP13 OP15

OP10

OP13

OP9

OP14

OP4OP2 OP6 OP8

OP4

OP7

OP3

OP8

OP12OP10 OP14

OP12

OP15

OP11

OP16

OP16

Page 31: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-7

Fig. 2-4: Channel positions for n+1

Fig. 2-5: Channel positions for n+1 with XPIC

OP2OP1 OP4 OP6

RPSC #1

PR1

OP4

OP1

OP5

OP10OP8 OP12 OP14

OP9

OP12

OP8

OP13

OP3PR1 OP5 OP7

OP3

OP6

OP2

OP7

OP11OP9 OP13

OP11

OP14

OP10

RPSC #2

PR1OP1 OP2 OP3

RPSC

PR1

OP2

OP1

OP3

OP5OP4 OP6 OP7

OP5

OP6

OP4

OP7

Page 32: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-8

Fig. 2-6: Channel positions - type A for n+2 with XPIC

Fig. 2-7: Channel positions - type B for n+2 with XPIC

OP2OP1 OP3 OP5

RPSC #1

PR1

OP3

OP1

OP4

OP9OP7 OP11 OP13

OP8

OP11

OP7

OP12

PR2PR1 OP4 OP6

PR2

OP5

OP2

OP6

OP10OP8 OP12 OP14

OP10

OP13

OP9

OP14

RPSC #3

RPSC #2 RPSC #4

OP1PR1 OP3 OP5

RPSC #1

PR2

OP1

PR1

OP2

OP9OP7 OP11 OP13

OP8

OP11

OP7

OP12

OP2PR2 OP4 OP6

OP4

OP5

OP3

OP6

OP10OP8 OP12 OP14

OP10

OP13

OP9

OP14

RPSC #3

RPSC #2 RPSC #4

Page 33: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-9

2.2 Modem Unit addressesKey word 2-1: Setting Modem Unit addresses

Each modem unit (MU) in a n+m configuration must have its own address. The definition of OP1...16 orPR1/2 will be determined by these addresses which are adjustable at Sub-D address connector X77 ineach MU. Bits A0...A5 define the address of the left part of the MU, while bits B0...B5 define the addressof the right part of the MU. Bits A5/B5 define the direction.

A5/B5 A4/B4 A3/B3 A2/B2 A1/B1 A0/B0 HEX Channel0 0 0 0 1 01 OP10 0 0 1 0 02 OP20 0 0 1 1 03 OP30 0 1 0 0 04 OP40 0 1 0 1 05 OP50 0 1 1 0 06 OP60 0 1 1 1 07 OP70 1 0 0 0 08 OP80 1 0 0 1 09 OP90 1 0 1 0 0A OP100 1 0 1 1 0B OP110 1 1 0 0 0C OP120 1 1 0 1 0D OP130 1 1 1 0 0E OP140 1 1 1 1 0F OP151 0 0 0 0 10 OP161 0 0 0 1 12 PR11 0 0 1 0 12 PR2

0 West1 East

After making new settings or modifying addresses at the address connector, all modulesconnected must be reset to ensure a secure adoption of the new addresses.

Page 34: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-10

2.3 RPSC addressesKey word 2-2: Setting RPSC addresses

In n+1and n+2 system configurations, each RPSC must have a separate address, which can be selectedby means of switch S1 on the rear side of the RPSC. In configurations with more than 7+1 channels, twoto four RPSCs are arranged in a cascade.

ADR0 PR1 West1 PR2 West2 PR1 West Cascade3 PR2 West Cascade4 PR1 East5 PR2 East6 PR1 East Cascade7 PR2 East Cascade

Page 35: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-11

2.4 LON and CAN system bus

Fig. 2-8: LON bus 6+2 XPIC

Fig. 2-9: LON bus 14+2 XPIC

OHAU MU

MU

MU

MU

RPSC

RPSC

OHAU MU

MU MU

MU MU

MU MU

MU

RPSC

RPSC

RPSC

RPSC

Page 36: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-12

Fig. 2-10: CAN bus 6+2 XPIC

Fig. 2-11: CAN bus 14+2 XPIC

MU

MU

MU

MU

RPSC

RPSC

MU

MU MU

MU MU

MU MU

MU

RPSC

RPSC

RPSC

RPSC

Page 37: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Rack Configuration

RF/160 OI 2-13

2.5 STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH)

Fig. 2-12: SOH

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 RF1 RF2 E1 F1

D1 RF3 RF4 D2 D3

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12

S1 M1 E2

Pointer

RSOH

MSOH

Standardized bytes

A1, A2B1, B2J0D1 - D3D4 - D12E1E2F1K1, K2S1M1

Media-specific bytes

RF1

RF2 RF3 RF4

Optional service channels(freely configurable bytes with B2 correction in the MSOH)

2112 kbit/s wayside channel(2048 kbit/s to ITU-T G.703)

288 kbit/s service channel(4x64 kbit/s, codirectional, to ITU-T G.703)

Synchronization (A1: 11110110; A2: 00101000)PerformanceRegenerator Section Trace (Path ID)Data Communication Channel (DCCR)Data Communication Channel (DCCM)Regenerator EOW (64 kbit/s)Multiplex EOW (64 kbit/s or V.11)Data Channel (64 kbit/s)Bytes for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)Timing Marker Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS-REI)

4-bit line ID, LA Tx bit, ATPC bit,1-bit HSB control or Tx level, 1-bit polarization ID1 parity bit, 7-bit line error pulses8-bit protection control RPS8-bit B2 value transmission

Page 38: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Rack Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI2-14

Fig. 2-13: Utilization of media-specific SOH bytes

Line ID

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Line ID Line ID Line ID LA TX bit ATPC HSB controlor TX level Polarization ID

Line errorpulse

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Line errorpulse

Parity bitLine errorpulse

Line errorpulse

Line errorpulse

Line errorpulse

Line errorpulse

Protectioncontrol RPS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Protectioncontrol RPS

Protectioncontrol RPS

Protectioncontrol RPS

Protectioncontrol RPS

Protectioncontrol RPS

Protectioncontrol RPS

Protectioncontrol RPS

B2 valuetransmission

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B2 valuetransmission

B2 valuetransmission

B2 valuetransmission

B2 valuetransmission

B2 valuetransmission

B2 valuetransmission

B2 valuetransmission

Media-specific byte RF1

Media-specific byte RF2

Media-specific byte RF3

Media-specific byte RF4

Page 39: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Starting the Service PC

RF/160 OI 3-1

3 Starting the Service PC

The present manual describes the system configurations based on the application software for theService PC:

DRS 155 E Version : 1.21

Application Software (MSP) Id. no.: AN00235704 Drawing no.: 65.7206.400.00-002(contains Application Software (MSP) German and English Version).

Service PC (LMT/MSP)

The PC should meet the following minimum requirements:

Pentium 133 MHzRAM >16 MBWindows 95/98

For system configuration, a laptop loaded with the SISA basic software (version ≥ 2.16) and applicationsoftware DRS 155 E for SDH microwave radio systems is required.The PC is connected via a cable (Sub-D 9-pin, female, UNC --- Sub-D 9-pin, male, M3, 1:1) to theF-interface (RS 232) of the SISA module mounted in the OHAU subrack.This interface is adjusted to 9600 Baud/s, 8 data bits and even parity.For more detailed information on the SISA structure, please refer to the User Manual for theModular Service PC.

The SISA network driver and SISA network manager are now activated.Access to the User application is possible via the DRS 155 E button.

Page 40: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Starting the Service PC Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI3-2

Page 41: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-1

4 Configuration

By selecting

HW view

Modules

the 'Rack configuration' view is activated and can be used to access the individual modules.For identifying the modules, it is possible to activate the ID or Wink function via the following menuoptions:

Mode

Wink

The LEDs on modules or module groups selected start to blink.

Any modification of the following system configurations are only activated after a system or module reset.

� SISA0N: Redundancy� DPU � General: XPIC� DPU � General: Redundancy

Page 42: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-2

4.1 General settings

4.1.1 Protection switching mode / RedundancyThe operating mode used must be identical in all DPUs of a microwave radio terminal (see section 4.7.8).For mapping the system into the QD2 information model, the SISA-0/N module must be appropriatelyconfigured for each terminal (see section 4.9.12).

4.1.2 XPICFor XPIC operation, the following configuration settings must be made on all modules involved(Master: left MU half; Slave: right MU half):

Module Option RemarksDPU Master/Slave XPIC active After each modification, the DPU must

be reset.Modulator Master/Slave XPIC activeDemodulator Master/Slave XPIC activeMain Receiver Master/Slave XPIC active Only for alarm signalling

Master RX oscillator Master Only for alarm signallingSlave RX oscillator Slave

Transmitter Master/Slave XPIC active Only for alarm signallingMaster TX oscillator Master Only for alarm signallingSlave TX oscillator Slave

XPIC operation is not possible in the 1+1 hot standby and 1+1 line protection mode with only oneDPU/RPS STM-1.

For more details on co-channel operation with XPIC, see chapter 18.

4.1.3 ATPCAll setting options for ATPC are located on the Transmitter and Main Receiver modules.

4.1.4 STM-1 processingThe complete STM-1 processing can be configured in the DPU module.

4.1.5 Protection switchingAll protection switching settings and monitoring functions are implemented in the DPU module.

4.1.6 Auxiliary channelsFor using auxiliary channels transmitted in the SOH, the following settings must be made:1. In the DPU, to which the corresponding OHAU is connected, access to the desired auxiliary channel

must be activated (see section 4.7.8)2. In the SOH or SOH Extension module, the corresponding auxiliary channel must be activated and its

interface and protection switching options must be configured.

Auxiliary channels in the RFCOH have to be configured only in the RFCOH Access Module.

Section 4.9.1 gives a detailed overview of service channel options available.

Page 43: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-3

4.2 Transmitter (Tx)

By selecting the module in the HW view

RF unit

Transmitter

Management

Configuration

the following Tx configuration window appears:

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps:

Process

Modify

Page 44: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-4

Key word 4-1: Activating the Tx XPICGeneral

� XPICThis option is activated in XPIC operation. In the Slave mode, the synchronizationinput of the oscillator is monitored by the Tx Slave.

Tx oscillator

MasterIn XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter operates as clock source (Master) forsynchronizing the cross-polarly connected transmitter.

�In normal operation (without XPIC), the transmitters always operate as Master.

SlaveIn XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter is synchronized by the cross-polarlyconnected transmitter (Master).

This setting is only used to enable or disable the XPIC sychronization alarm of the oscillator module.

Key word 4-2: Adjusting the Tx power

Tx RF output

� Power onThe Tx output power can be switched on or off.

Maximum levelThe following Tx power values can be adjusted:

Nominal valueNominal value - 3 dBNominal value - 6 dBNominal value - 9 dBNominal value +1.5 dB (ATPC enabled) The overdrive mode is only active with the ATPC

function enabled.

�Setting in normal operation: Nominal value.Key word 4-3: Activating the ATPC Tx

Page 45: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-5

ATPC

� EnableThe transmit power is controlled by the ATPC circuit of the far-end receiver.

In order to avoid interferences in densely meshed networks or on links with difficult propagationconditions, the ATPC function must be active. More detailed data are obtained in the scope of radio hopplanning.The maximum ATPC range is 20 dB / 19.5 dB / 16 dB. The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (3 to 8 GHz)/ +12 dBm (13 GHz) is not undershot.

�Setting in normal operation: Active

Actual stateThis option displays the status of ATPC control and of the control channel in the return direction.

ATPC deactivated via configurationThe ATPC is deactivated for operation with constant Tx power.

Control loop switched off, error timer runningThe transmission channel for ATPC control information (Rx � Tx) is interrupted and the errortimer is running. The Tx output power is set to the maximum value until the service channel has been re-established or the timer has expired.

Control loop switched off, error timer expiredThe transmission channel for ATPC control information (Rx � Tx) is interrupted and the errortimer has expired. The Tx output power is set to a user-defined value until the service channel has been re-established.

Control activeThe Tx power is controlled by the far-end receiver (Rx).

Key word 4-4: Adjusting the Tx ATPC holding time

Error processing

� XPIC dependenceWhen this option is active, XPIC operation is taken into account in case of ATPC errors. Theoutput power of the cross-polar transmitter is controlled synchronously up to the expiry of theerror timer.

Error timer

In case of interruptions of ATPC control information transmission, an error timer is started. The Tx outputpower is set to its maximum value until transmission has been re-established or the timer has expired.

The timer can be set to the following values:

8 s ...68 min

� Recommended setting : 4 min. (default value)

Page 46: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-6

Tx level after error timer has expiredThe following values can be adjusted:

Minimum valueNominal value - 14.5 dBNominal value - 9.5 dBNominal value - 4.5 dBNominal value

�Recommended setting: Minimum value

Key word 4-5: RF band position – Tx

Band selection

Band positionThe RF modules can be used for LB and UB operation.

UnderlayingThe RF channel frequency lies below the oscillator frequency (-140 MHz).

OverlayingThe RF channel frequency lies above the oscillator frequency (+140 MHz).

Subband

The selected RF bands are divided up into four subbands each. The channel frequency depends onthe selected subband and the band position in the RF mixer.Also see chapter 12 Frequency Setting .

Lower subband 1Lower subband 2Lower subband 3Lower subband 4Upper subband 1Upper subband 2Upper subband 3Upper subband 4

Page 47: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-7

4.3 Tx oscillatorKey word 4-6: Requesting the Tx oscillator frequency

By selecting the module in the HW view,

RF unit

Tx oscillator

Management

Configuration

the following Tx oscillator configuration window appears:

This mask displays the nominal oscillator frequency.

Page 48: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-8

4.4 Main receiver (Rx)

By selecting the module in the HW view,

RF unit

Main receiver

Management

Configuration

the following Rx configuration window appears:

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps:

Process

Modify

Page 49: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-9

Key word 4-7: Activating the Rx XPIC

General

� XPIC activeThis option is activated in XPIC operation. In the Slave mode, the synchronization input of theoscillator is monitored by the Rx Slave.

Rx oscillator

MasterIn XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the receiver operates as clock source (Master) forsynchronizing the cross-polarly connected receiver.

�In normal operation (without XPIC), the receiver operates as Master.

SlaveIn XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the receiver is synchronized by the cross-polarlyconnected receiver (Master).

This setting is used only to enable or disable the XPIC synchronization alarm of the oscillatormodule.

IF amplifier

Operating mode

NormalDue to the low control time constant, the amplifier can react to rapid level fluctuations.

�Setting in normal operation: Normal

SweepThe control time constant of the IF amplifier is increased. Thus, rapid level fluctuations are not compensated during a sweep measurement in order not to falsify the test result.

Key word 4-8: Activating the Rx ATPC

ATPC

� Manual TX power control (MTPC)The ATPC is deactivated. The power of the far-end transmitter can be adjusted manually in the "Manual Tx level" box.

�Setting in normal operation: inactive

� Overdrive mode permitted Tx power control depends on the BER of the receive signal. At a BER of approx. 1E-6, the reachable maximum Tx power is increased by 1.5 dB in the overdrive mode (this must also be enabled in the far-end transmitter). In this mode, the backoff factor required to achieve the specified residual bit error ratio (RBER) is reduced. The resulting degradation, however, is neglible compared with the BER of 1E-6 occurring on the radio hop. This permits the radio hop link to be maintained even in case of deep fading events. Activation starts at PRx < -68 dBm for 64 MLQAM and at PRx < -66 dBm for 128 MLQAM. The overdrive mode is only active, if the ATPC function has been enabled.

Page 50: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-10

Key word 4-9: Adjusting the Rx ATPC reference level

Control levelThe nominal receive level can be adjusted to the following values:

-30 dBm-40 dBm-45 dBm-50 dBm

Actual stateThis option displays the status of ATPC control and that of the control channel in the return direction.

ATPC deactivated via configurationThe ATPC is deactivated for operation with constant Tx power.

Control loop switched off, error timer expiredThe ATPC controlled transmission channel is interrupted and the error timer has expired.The far-end Tx output power is set to a user defined value until the transmission channel hasbeen re-established.

Control loop active, Rx level controlThe far-end Tx power is controlled by the receive level.

Control loop active, BER controlThe far-end Tx power is controlled by the receive level and BER.

Control loop active, error timer runningThe ATPC-controlled transmission channel is interrupted and the error timer is running.The far-end Tx power is still controlled by the receive level.

Error handlingKey word 4-10: Adjusting the Rx ATPC holding time

Error timerThe following values can be adjusted as holding time for Tx power control in case ofinterruptions of the radio hop.

8 s ...68 min

�Recommended setting: 4 min. (default setting)

The holding time adjusted should not be too short, in order to avoid that the system becomesunstable in case of difficult propagation conditions.

Tx level after error timer has expired / Manual Tx level- The following values can be adjusted:

Minimum valueNominal value - 14.5 dBNominal value - 9.5 dBNominal value - 4.5 dBNominal value

�Setting in normal operation: Nominal value

The maximum ATPC range is 20 dB (3 to 8 GHz, 64MLQAM) / 19.5 dB (3 to 8 GHz, 128MLQAM) / 16 dB(13 GHz). The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (3-8 GHz) / +12 dBm (13 GHz) cannot be undershot.

Page 51: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-11

Key word 4-11: RF band position - Rx

Frequency band selection

Band positionThe RF modules can be used for LB and UB operation.

Lower sidebandThe channel frequencies lie below the oscillator frequency (-140 MHz).

Upper sidebandThe channel frequencies lie above the oscillator frequency (+140 MHz).

SubbandThe selected RF bands are divided up into four subbands each. The channel frequency depends on the selected subband and the band position in the RF mixer.Also see chapter 12 Frequency Setting .

Lower subband 1Lower subband 2Lower subband 3Lower subband 4Upper subband 1Upper subband 2Upper subband 3Upper subband 4

Page 52: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-12

4.5 Rx oscillatorKey word 4-12: Requesting the Rx oscillator frequency

By selecting the module in the HW view,

RF unit

Rx oscillator

Management

Configuration

the following Rx oscillator configuration window appears:

This mask shows the nominal oscillator frequency.

Page 53: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-13

4.6 Diversity receiver (RxD)

RF unit

Div. receiver

Management

Configuration

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps:

Process

Modify

Page 54: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-14

IF amplifier

Operating mode

NormalDue to the small control time constant, the amplifier can react to rapid level fluctuations.

�Setting in normal operation: Normal

SweepThe control time constant of the IF amplifier is high. Thus, rapid level fluctuations during sweep measurements are not compensated in order not to falsify the test results.

Key word 4-13: Adjusting the RxD modulation

Combiner

Modulation scheme (read-only access)The distortion-controlled IF combiner evaluates the distortions occurring in the IF spectrum.The following modulation modes can be adjusted:

64 QAM128 QAM

IF output level (read-only access)Two modes are possible:

controlled Normal operationuncontrolled Only for length compensation

Length compensation

Path

MainThe waveguide of the main path (main antenna) is shorter than the one of the diversity path.The length compensation cable is inserted in signal path X2 � X23.

DiversityThe waveguide of the diversity path (diversity antenna) is shorter than the one of the main path.The length compensation cable is inserted in signal path X22 � X23.

Delay compensationThis setting permits electronic fine tuning within a range of approx. 2.5 ns.

0...255Corresponds to an approximate delay change of 2.5 ... 0 ns referred to the combiner input X23.

Page 55: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-15

Operating mode

Power and distortion control (normal)The combiner evaluates the spectrum and adds up the two receive signals.Before being added, the lower signal is suppressed by 2 dB per 1 dB difference.

Max. ratioThe combiner adds up the two signals, the stronger signal (max. C/N) being preferred.Signal distortions caused by selective fading are not taken into account.Before being added, the lower signal is suppressed by 2 dB per 1 dB difference.

�Normal operation: Power and distortion control (normal)

Test mode

Normal operationBoth IF input signals are added up.

Input X24 permanently through-connectedOnly the signal available at input X24 is passed through to the output.

Input X23 permanently through-connectedOnly the signal available at input X23 is passed through to the output.

�Setting in normal operation: Normal

Length compensation

� Compensation ONThe mode required for executing and testing the length compensation function is activated.The signals available at the combiner inputs are shifted with respect to each other using aprogrammable phase shifter. Delay time differences between the main and diversity signalpaths caused by different waveguide lengths lead to notches moving through the outputspectrum. Using an IF spectrum analyzer connected to the combiner output, the delay timedifference between the main and diversity signal paths can be determined and the lengthcompensation can be performed and tested.

� Auto-runThe phase shifter is periodically triggered with the adjustable frequency.A notch occurring is moving through the spectrum.

This option does not have to be acknowledged after selection!

� Single stepThe phase of the phase shifter is shifted by approx. 3 degrees per step. The notch moves through the IF spectrum in single steps.

This option does not have to be acknowledged after selection!

FrequencySelectable frequency which is used to trigger the phase shifter in the auto-run mode.

0.5...5 Hz

Page 56: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-16

4.6.1 Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations

Key word 4-14: Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations

The delay time compensation in space diversity configurations is described in section 4.10.2 of theCommissioning Instructions RF/160-CI included in this Operator Manual.

Page 57: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-17

4.7 Modem Unit (MU)

Modem OPx/PRx

This command opens the MU configuration window:

Page 58: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-18

4.7.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical

Electrical STM-1 interface

No configuration necessary.

Page 59: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-19

4.7.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical

Optical STM-1 interface

OPT

Management

Configuration

Control mode

ALCAutomatic Laser Control.The power of the laser diode is controlled automatically.

Operating mode

Only active if the module does not receive a valid input signal ("LOS" module alarm).

ALC restart

� TestThe laser power is switched on for 2 seconds.

� ManualThe laser power is switched on for 90 seconds.

Page 60: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-20

4.7.3 RPSI STM-1

No configuration necessary.

Page 61: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-21

4.7.4 Modem Unit Power Supply

No configuration necessary.

Page 62: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-22

4.7.5 Modulator

MD 155/140...

Management

Configuration

64MLQAM:

128MLQAM:

Key word 4-15: Activating the MD XPIC

Operating mode

� XPICFor synchronization in XPIC operation.

Data signal from

Own DPUNormal setting.

Opposite DPUSetting for the right MD for 1+1 HSB and 1+1 Line Diversity with only one DPU STM-1 (A002).

Key word 4-16: Unmodulated IF carrier

Carrier (only for 64 MLQAM)

Test signalThe MD supplies the transmitter with an unmodulated IF signal (140 MHz).The latter can be used for intermodulation and XPD measurements.

Page 63: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-23

ModulatedThe IF output signal is 64 MLQAM modulated.

�Setting in normal operation: modulated.

Mode (only for 128 MLQAM)

NormalThe IF output signal is 128MLQAM modulated.

Test signalTest signal with two sub-carriers �11 MHz from the IF center frequency (140 MHz) for antennaalignment.

Page 64: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-24

4.7.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140...

Management

Configuration

64MLQAM:

128MLQAM:

Key word 4-17: Activating the DM XPIC

Mode

� XPICFor synchronization in XPIC operation.

Key word 4-18: Adjusting the DM group delay equalizer

Group delay equalizer (only for 64 MLQAM)

The group delay equalizer in the demodulator compensates distortions caused by the connection of RFfilters with a direct adjacent channel spacing. Direct adjacent channel filters are the channels routed at aspacing of +/- 40 MHz to the channel considered.

An important parameter is the number of direct adjacent channel filters "passed" above and below thechannel to be adjusted in the Tx and Rx branching network.

The mutual influence between two direct adjacent channels in a diplexer is half as high as with the samechannel combination with individual filters or combinations of individual filters and diplexers.Two direct adjacent channels arranged within a diplexer identify "one complete passage" only after theTx-side and Rx-side diplexer have been passed. Diplexers are always arranged in identical pairs both onthe Tx and Rx side.

Page 65: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-25

Example for determining the adjacent channel filters passed

Arrangement with a combination of individual filters and diplexer filters

(Schematic arrangement for demonstration purposes only; selection of appropriate attenuation values inthe factory => Reverse order of channel diplexers on the Tx and Rx side).

- Channel 2a passes direct adjacent channel filter 1a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)(corresponds to line 6 of the table below).

- Channel 1a passes direct adjacent channel filter 2a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)(corresponds to line 4 of the table below).

- Channel 4a passes direct adjacent channel filter 5a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)(corresponds to line 4 of the table below).

- Channel 5a passes direct adjacent channel filter 4a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)(corresponds to line 6 of the table below).

- Channel 3a passes direct adjacent channel filters 4a (2x) and 2a (2x)(corresponds to line 3 of the table below).

- Since the compensation takes place at IF level, a distinction of different cases is necessary depending onthe position of the RF oscillator with respect to the RF channel (downstream combination in reverse oridentical position).

TX RX

1a

4a

3a

2a

1a

2a

4a

3a

TX RX

TX RX

TX RX

TX RX5a

5a

Page 66: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-26

Number of direct adjacent channelfilters f passed

Setting of group delay equalizer inthe DM module depending on bandposition of channel to be adjusted

fRF *)

No. f > fRF f < fRF fRF-LO < fRF

(overlaying)fRF-LO > fRF

(underlaying)

1 0 0

2 1 1 [1] [1]

3 2 2

4 1 0 [2] [3]

5 2 1

6 0 1 [3] [2]

7 1 2

8 2 0 [4] [5]

9 0 2 [5] [4]

fRF Frequency of the RF channel to be adjustedfRF-LO RF oscillator frequency of the RF channel (see read-only configuration value in the oscillator

module)f Frequency of direct adjacent channel(s)*) The band position corresponds to the band position configuration in the Tx or Rx module; also

see Chapter 12 of the Operating Instructions: "Frequency Setting".

Possible settings in the "Delay equalizer" listbox of the demodulator 64 MLQAM module:

[1] No adjacent channel filters;

[2] 1 adjacent channel filter above the center frequency;

[3] 1 adjacent channel filter below the center frequency;

[4] 2 adjacent channel filters above the center frequency;

[5] 2 adjacent channel filters below the center frequency.

Page 67: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-27

4.7.7 Controller module

Controller

Management

Configuration

Backplane

VersionDisplays the backplane version.

Page 68: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-28

4.7.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit

DPU/RPS STM-1

Management

Configuration

General

Key word 4-19: Defining the OP and PR channel no.

DirectionIndicates the direction selected by means of the address connector in the MU.A radio terminal station always operates in the West mode.In a radio repeater station (two terminals connected back to back), one NE operates in the Westmode and one in the East mode.

EastWest

Page 69: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-29

Slot positionIndicates the card slot position of the DPU in the MU subrack.

LeftRight

ChannelIndicates the channel no. selected using the address connector.

OP1...OP16Operating channel 1 ... 16

PR1...PR2Protection channel 1 ... 2

� XPICEnables the XPIC mode in the DPU. Each modification requires a reset.

RedundancyAdjustment of the protection switching mode of the microwave radio system.Each modification requires a reset.

NoneNo protection switching option; N+0 configuration.

Equipment protectionHot standby (HSB) protection with one DPU STM-1 A002.

1+1 line protection without occasional traffic (OT)1+1 line protection with only one DPU STM-1 A002.Occasional traffic (OT) and XPIC operation are not possible.This operating mode is not available for all DPU software versions.

n+m line protectionN+M line protection mode. With DPU STM-1 A001 and RPSI / RPSC.

Modulation mode The correct setting of the modulation mode is absolutely necessary for systems operating in the n+m line protection mode.

64 QAMSetting for equipment units equipped with a 64QAM demodulator (65.7205.155.00,Id. no. 061292).

128 QAMSetting for equipment units equipped with a 128QAM demodulator (65.7205.610.00,Id. no. 094840).

Not definedModulation mode not defined.

Page 70: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-30

Loopback

Key word 4-20: BB/IF Loopback

Note: Always deactivate the automatic switchover function before you configure a loopback.

Line side

� Radio directionThe IF signal is switched back to the IF interface with RSOH processing.

� Line directionThe BB signal is switched back to the BB interface without RSOH processing.

Radio side

� Radio directionThe IF signal is switched back to the IF interface without RSOH processing.

� Line directionThe BB signal is switched back to the BB interface with RSOH processing.

Loopback timeoutThe loopback is disconnected automatically after the adjusted period and the system returns again tonormal operation.

5 min15 min 1 h 4 h

24 h

Page 71: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-31

Line protection

OP:

PR:

� Enable QA0 criterion- Activation of the QA0 criterion for protection switching purposes.- The QA0 criterion is a threshold activated in case of an interruption of the data channel.

After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on the Tx-side a switchover iscarried out.

- QA0 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.

� Enable QA1 criterion- Activation of the QA1 criterion for protection switching purposes.- The QA1 criterion is a threshold activated in case of a strong degradation of the transmission

quality of the channel. After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on theTx-side a switchover is carried out.

- QA1 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.

Page 72: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-32

� Enable QA2 criterion- Activation of the QA2 criterion for protection switching purposes.- The QA2 criterion is a threshold activated in case of a slight degradation of the transmission

quality of the channel. After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on theTx-side a switchover is carried out.

- QA2 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.

� Enable LWI criterion1

- Activation of the LWI criterion for protection switching purposes.- The LWI criterion is the sum of early warning pulses (correction pulses) of the DM FEC of

each DM included in a transmission link covering several radio hops. After synchronization ofthe operating and protection channel on the Tx-side a switchover is carried out.

Q0 threshold valueQ1 threshold valueQ2 threshold value- Adjustable Bit Error Ratio (BER) for the Qx thresholds, with Q0 > Q1 > Q2. Values between

10-12 and 10-3 are adjustable. The respective threshold is taken into consideration only if theassociated QA criterion has been enabled.

� Recommanded setting: 64 QAM 128 QAMQ2=10-11 Q2=10-12

Q1=10-8 Q1=10-8

Q0=10-4 Q0=10-4

LWI criterion LWI criterion1

Alarm threshold value- Number of protection switchovers to enable the "number of protection switchovers exceeded

threshold" alarm.Key word 4-21: Switching thresholds

Operating channel� Automatic- When this option has been selected, the channel will be protection-switched automatically in

case of a fault or degradation of the transmission quality. The “Setting” box displays thechannel automatically selected (OP, PR1 or PR2).If this option has not been selected (check mark), user-controlled switchover is possible viathe “Setting” box.

� Frequency diversity (read-only access)- The signal of the operating channel is transmitted parallelly via a second RF channel

(protection/standby channel). An internally controlled switch selects the better one of the twosignals on the receive side.Frequency diversity is activated only in the “1+1 line protection without OT” systemconfiguration (with a DPU/RPS STM-1 A002 module)!

SettingWith the “Automatic on” option selected, the channel (OP, PR1 or PR2) currently used will bedisplayed:- OP

No protection switching active.- PR1

The operating channel has been protection-switched and is being protected bystandby channel PR1.

- PR2The operating channel has been protection-switched and is being protected bystandby channel PR2.

1 In case of 128 QAM systems with OT option, it is recommended not to enable the LWI criterion in

order to avoid unnecessary interruptions of the channel used for transmitting occasional traffic. Thisapplies to DPU software versions up to V106/221100.

Page 73: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-33

With the “Automatic off” option selected, a user-controlled switchover is possible. In this case,the system behaviour depends on the “Precedence” option.

The “Precedence” option inactive leads to a manual switchover request:- OP

An existing protection switching function shall be deactived, if possible.- PR1

The operating channel shall be protected by standby channel PR1, if possible.- PR2

The operating channel shall be protected by standby channel PR2, if possible.- PR1 or PR2

The operating channel shall be protected by standby channel PR1 or PR2, if possible.The appropriate selection is made by the system on an internal basis. No display.

The “Precedence” option active leads to a forced switchover request:- OP

An existing protection switching function is deactivated. The operating channel is neverprotection-switched.

- PR1The operating channel is continuously protected by standby channel PR1, provided that thelatter is not used for occasional traffic (OT) on a permanent basis.

- PR2The operating channel is continuously protected by standby channel PR2, provided that thelatter is not used for occasional traffic (OT) on a permanent basis.

- PR1 or PR2The operating channel is continuously protected by standby channel PR1 or PR2.The appropriate selection is made by the system. Only command, no display.

� PrecedenceIn case of an automatic switchover (“Automatic“ active), the following applies:- This option increases the priority of the operating channel for protection switching

(see “Priority” box). Priority low = 15, Priority high = 0.- The activation of the “Precedence” option causes the value in the “Priority” box to be

reduced by 8 (� higher channel priority) provided that the value displayed was higher than 7.- The deactivation of the “Precedence” option causes the value in the “Priority” box to be

increased by 8 (� lower channel priority) provided that the value displayed was lower than 8.

In case of a user-controlled switchover (“Automatic” not active), the following applies:- If the “Precedence” option is active, a switchover command is always executed, independent

of the status of the selected channel (� forced switchover).- If the “Precedence” option is not active, the system permits a switchover only if the selected

channel is not faulty. After switchover, the system will return to the operating channelautomatically as soon as a fault is detected in the channel selected by the user (� manualswitchover request).

Priority- Adjustable channel priority. High = 0. Low = 15.

0...15

Page 74: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-34

Protection channel

Occasional traffic- The system can transmit low-priority traffic via an additional SPI module in the protection

channel. In case of failures, the OP channel is protected by the PR channel and occasionaltraffic is interrupted.

none- No occasional traffic.- If none of the OP channels is faulty in the 'n+m line protection mode' of an 1+1 configuration,

the data of operating channel OP1 are parallelly transmitted in PR1 (active frequencydiversity).

loose- The transmission of low-priority data is interrupted as soon as an OP channel is detected to

be faulty.

fixed- Permanent transmission of low-priority data signals. Protection switchover is not possible.

Page 75: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-35

Equipment protection

Key word 4-22: HSB equipment protection

Receiver

Mode

Automatic- Protection switchover takes place automatically as soon as an error is detected on the receive

side.

Locked- No automatic protection switching. The setting is frozen.

Manual switchover- The receive side can be switched over using the corresponding setting.

Setting- In the 'Automatic' or 'Locked' mode: Display of the active Rx path (OP or PR).- In the 'Manual switchover' mode: Display and setting of the active Rx path.

PR- Used to display and select the PR protection channel.

OP- Used to display and select the OP operating channel.

Page 76: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-36

Priority controlDefinition of priority control in the "Locked" and "Manual switchover" modes.Arbitrary setting in the "Automatic" mode.

equalManual switchover and automatic switchover are equal in priority.The last switching state will be maintained.

automaticAutomatic switchover has priority.Switchover takes place even in the "Locked" mode or in case of a fault.

manualManual switchover has priority.

Manual switchover to a faulty channel is possible.

� RF switch equippedAn RF switch is available for the Rx side. Otherwise a 10 dB coupler is used.

� Diversity switch equippedAn RF switch is available for the Rx side with space diversity operation.Otherwise a 10 dB coupler is used.

� Baseband diversityBaseband diversity has been selected for the receive side.

Page 77: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-37

Transmitter

Mode

AutomaticProtection switchover will be executed automatically as soon as an error is detected on thetransmit side.

LockedNo automatic protection switching. The setting is frozen.

Manual switchoverThe transmit side can be switched over in the "Setting" box.

SettingIn the "Automatic" or "Locked" mode: Display of the active Tx path (OP or PR)In the "Manual switchover" mode: Display and setting of the active Tx path (OP or PR)

PRUsed to display and select the PR protection channel.

OPUsed to display and select the OP operating channel.

Priority control Definition of priority control in the "Locked" and "Manual switchover" modes. Arbitrary setting in the "Automatic" mode.

equalManual and automatic switching are equal in priority.The last switching state will be maintained.

automaticAutomatic switching has priority.Switchover takes place even in the "Locked" mode and in case of a fault.

manualManual switching has priority.Manual switchover to a faulty channel is possible.

� RF switch equippedAn RF switch is used for the Tx side.

Switch type

PINA PIN diode switch is used.

RelaisAn RF relay is used.

� Far-end station activePermits a forced switchover on the Tx side if the OP and PR Rx paths in the far end are disturbedsimultaneously.

Page 78: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-38

Radio hop

Key word 4-23: Radio hop identifier

Transmitter

Radio hop identifierConfigurable radio hop identifier inserted in the transmit direction.

0....15

Receiver

Radio hop identifierRadio hop identifier expected from the receive direction.If the radio hop identifier received differs from the one expected, AIS will be inserted.

0....15

Page 79: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-39

SOH processing

Key word 4-24: SOH processing

General

Line to radio

� Invert B1The B1 byte will be inverted for tests in the radio direction.This setting is not relevant if automatic protection switching has been activated in the far-end DPU and/or a manual switchover has taken place.

� Insert AIS in case of J0-TIMIf the expected and received path trace identifier signals differ from each other(Trace Identifier Mismatch), AIS will be inserted.

� Insert AIS in case of SES (B1)If the SES threshold (ITU-T G.826 ~ BER = 2E-5) is exceeded, AIS will be inserted.

Radio to line

� Invert B1For testing purposes, the B1 byte is inverted in the line direction.

� Insert AIS in case of J0-TIMIf the expected and received path trace identifier signals differ from each other(Trace Identifier Mismatch), AIS will be inserted.

� Insert AIS in case of SES (B1)If the SES threshold (ITU-T G.826 ~ BER = 2E-5) is exceeded, AIS will be inserted.

Page 80: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-40

J0/C1

Line to radio

Processing

noneThe J0/C1 byte is not evaluated. No processing.

Process J0The J0 Path Trace Identifier of the signal from the line direction is monitored and compared with the expected string.In the radio direction, the J0 Path Trace string to be sent is inserted.The J0 Path Trace strings can be adjusted under the "User data" menu item of the DPU module.

Process C1The C1 byte of the signal from the line direction is monitored and compared with the byte expected.In the radio direction, the C1 byte to be sent is inserted.

C1 value transmittedDefines the C1 byte transmitted in the radio direction.

0...255

C1 value received (read only)Displays the C1 byte received from the line side.

0...255

Radio to line

Processing

noneThe J0/C1 byte is not evaluated. No processing.

Process J0The J0 Path Trace Identifier of the signal from the radio direction is monitored and compared with the expected string.In the line direction, the J0 Path Trace string to be sent is inserted.The J0 Path Trace strings can be adjusted under the "User data" menu item of the DPU module.

Process C1The C1 byte of the signal from the radio direction is monitored and compared with the expected byte.In the line direction, the C1 byte to be sent is inserted.

C1 value transmittedDefines the C1 byte transmitted in the radio direction.

0...255

C1 value received (read only)Displays the C1 byte received from the line side.

0...255

Page 81: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-41

Service channels

Key word 4-25: Activating the service channel

The SOH Access Module processes the two bytes E1 and F1 in addition to 4x64k in the RSOH. Ifadditional bytes shall be used (e.g. E2), the SOH extension module is necessary.

� Normal operation: The service channels are not selected.

Enable (line to radio)The bytes to be processed can be selected. Otherwise the bytes will be through-connected.

� E1The E1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.

� Default setting: E1 transmits EOW#1.

� F1The F1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.

� Normal operation: F1 transmits EOW#2.

� E2The E2 byte (64kbit/s) in the MSOH can be accessed via the SOH extension module.

� DSCThe four digital service channels (4x64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.

� Normal operation: The first DSC is used for QTN data transmission.

Page 82: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-42

� WSCThe wayside channel (2048 kbit/s) in the SOH can be used.

� DCCRThe Data Communication Channel (Bytes D1 to D3) in the RSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.

� DCCMThe Data Communication Channel (Bytes D4 to D12) in the MSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.

Enable (radio to line)The bytes to be processed can be selected. All other bytes are through-connected.

� E1The E1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.

� Normal operation: E1 transmits EOW#1.

� F1The F1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.

� Normal operation: F1 transmits EOW#2.

� E2The E2 byte (64kbit/s) in the MSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.

� DSCThe four digital service channels (4x64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.

� Normal operation: The first DSC is used for QTN data transmission.

� WSCThe wayside channel (2048 kbit/s) in the SOH can be used.

� DCCRThe Data Communication Channel (Bytes D1 to D3) in the RSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.

� DCCMThe Data Communication Channel (Bytes D4 to D12) in the MSOH can be used with theSOH Extension module.

The PR protection channel for the STM-1 signal does not automatically represent the protection channel for service channels.In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels (1+1 protected) are transmitted in OP1 andOP2.

Page 83: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-43

DPU

Management

User Data

N+0:

N+M / HSB:

In this mask, the strings for the J0 Path Trace Identifier (15 bytes + 1 byte CRC) expected and to be sentcan be modified. However, these are only effective if J0 processing has been enabled (see Configurationof DPU – SOH processing). Received strings are displayed.

Page 84: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-44

4.7.9 DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching

4.7.9.1 Line protection (n+1/2)

Using the MAN switch on the front panel of the DPU/RPS, manual switchover is possible.

Key word 4-26: Manual protection switching

Fig. 4-1: DPU/RPS STM-1 front panel

TX RX

OPPR1PR2

MAN

SYNTX

SWITCHLOCK

DPURPS

H2 Channel OP

H1 FaultChannel OP

H4 Channel PR1

H6Channel PR2

H3 FaultChannel PR1

H5 FaultChannel PR2

H7 SynchronStatus

H8 SwitchingIndication

H9 IndicationTX or RX side

H10 ChannelLocking

S1 Switch

H11 FaultTX side

H12 FaultRX side

Page 85: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-45

LED displays

Tx alarmIndicates a general alarm on the Tx side of the DPU/RPS (e.g. no BB input at SPI).

Rx alarmIndicates an alarm on the Rx side of the DPU/RPS (e.g. no RF input signal.)

OP alarmThis LED lights up if the Q0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if Q2 or Q1 is exceeded (Rx side).QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)

PR1 alarmThis LED lights up if the QA0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if QA2 or QA1 is exceeded (Rx side).QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)

PR2 alarmThis LED lights up if the QA0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if QA2 or QA1 is exceeded (Rx side).QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)

NOTE:Fast flashing (50%) QA1 has been exceeded.Slow flashing (10%) QA2 has been exceeded.Very short pulse Protection channel information is not available

(only with line protection).

OPDisplays data traffic in the OP channel (Tx or Rx side).

PR1Displays data traffic in the PR1 channel (Tx or Rx side).

PR2Displays data traffic in the PR2 channel (Tx or Rx side).

SYNDisplays the optimum bit synchronization between OP and PR1/PR2 for bit-error-free switchover.If this LED is OFF, one data channel is faulty.

SwitchDisplays the start of a manual switchover.

LockDisplays a channel lock (OP, PR) at the associated DPU/RPS.Automatic protection switching in case of a failure is no longer possible.

TxDisplays the side currently in operation.LED is ON: Displays the operational status of the Tx side of the OP or PR.LED is OFF: Displays the operational status of the Rx side of the OP or PR.

The STM-1 traffic can be transmitted, for example, on the Tx side via the OP channel and onthe Rx side via the PR channel, or vice versa.

Page 86: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-46

Using the MAN switch

By pressing the MAN switch for a short time, the action (yellow Tx, LOCK or SWITCH LED) is switchedon or off.

By pressing it longer, it switches between the actions (Tx, LOCK or SWITCH).

OP�PR switchover

Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to switch over between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, the manual switching process to one of the PRs can be executed.

PR�OP switchover

After a manual switchover, press the MAN switch once for a longer period until the LOCK LED starts toflash, i.e. the system switches back to the OP and is locked.

The system selects the PR1 or PR2 protection channel by itself.

Switchover to a selected PR

If a selected PR shall be used for data transmission, the other PR has to be locked in the associatedDPU/RPS (PR1 or PR2).

TX RX

OPPR1PR2

SYNTX

SWITCHLOCK

PR1

Fig. 4-2: Locking of PR1

Page 87: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-47

After locking the selected PR at the associated DPU/RPS, switchover is necessary from the OP channelto the PR channel.Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual switchover to the unlocked PR is executed.

Fig. 4-3: Switching from OP1 to PR2

In case of systems with a n+1/2 configuration, manual switchover can be performed only on the Rx side. Rx switchover is executed from the far-end Tx side. In 1+1 HSB configurations, independent switchover of the Tx and Rx side is possible.

TX RX

OPPR1PR2

SYNTX

SWITCHLOCK

OP1

Page 88: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-48

4.7.9.2 Equipment protection (1+1 HSB)

Switching Tx1 (OP) to the antenna

When the LOCK LED is lit, press the MAN switch once for a longer period to disable the LOCK mode.Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual TX switchover to the OP is executed.

Fig. 4-4: Switching Tx1 to the antenna

TX RX

OPPR1PR2

SYNTX

SWITCHLOCK

Page 89: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-49

Switching Tx2 (PR) to the antenna

When the LOCK LED is lit, press the MAN switch once for a longer period to disable the LOCK mode.Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual TX switchover to the OP is executed.

Fig. 4-5: Switching Tx2 to the antenna

TX RX

OPPR1PR2

SYNTX

SWITCHLOCK

Page 90: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-50

4.8 RPSC + RPSH modules

4.8.1 RPSC module

RPS-C

Management

Configuration

The RPSC is required in n+1/+2 configurations.

StateDisplays the CAN bus operating mode of an RPSC.

TransitCAN bus in a cascade (8+1...14+2).

EndCAN bus termination for this RPSC.

Page 91: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-51

4.8.2 RPSH module

RPS-H

Management

Configuration

The RPSH is required in 1+1 HSB configurations.

Relay position

Indicates the active Tx/Rx path in a HSB configuration.

� Tx1Tx1 is active (OP).

� Tx2Tx2 is active (PR).

� Rx1Rx1 is active (OP) if an RF switch is available.

� Rx2Rx2 is active (PR) if an RF switch is available.

Page 92: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-52

4.9 Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)

4.9.1 Overview

Fig. 4-6: Service channels in the OHAU

Ana

log

Inte

rf.0.

3-34

4 kH

zAn

alog

Inte

rf.0.

3-34

4 kH

z

F1 E1 DS

C1

DS

C2

WSC

2/1

WS

C2/

2OH

AIC

F1 E1

DSC

1

DSC

2

WS

C2/

1

WS

C2/

2

OH

AIC

DS

C3

DS

C4

DSC

3

DSC

4

75�

120�

75�

120�

EOW

Arra

y

SOH

AM

odul

e

EOW

Mod

ule

1

PST

N2w

/6w

EO

WA

rray

EOW

Mod

ule

2

PSTN

2w/6

wEO

W b

ranc

h

Logi

c

75�

120�

75�

120�

East

Wes

t

DSC

8

DSC

7

WSC

2/1

WS

C2/

2

DSC

6

DSC

5

DSC

4

DSC

3

DSC

2

DSC

1

DSC

4x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

WSC

1x2

048

kbit/

s1+

1

DSC

4x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

Wes

t

RFC

OH

Mod

ule

75�

120�

75�

120�

WS

C 1

x204

8 kb

it/s

1+1

DSC

4x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

DSC

2x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

DS

C8

DS

C7

WS

C2/

1

WS

C2/

2

DS

C6

DS

C5

DS

C4

DS

C3

DS

C2

DS

C1

East

RFC

OH

Mod

ule

75�

120�

75�

120�

E2

SOH

Ext

.M

odul

e

DC

CR/

DC

CM

WES

T

DSC

1x6

4 kb

it/s

1+0

SIS

A K

Bus

Con

verte

r

QSC

1x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

Q In

terfa

ceR

S485

Q In

terfa

ceR

S485

QD

2M

odul

e

WSC

1x20

48kb

it/s

1+1

DSC

4x64

kbit/

s1+

1

DSC

2x64

kbit/

s1+

1

A B

DSC

4x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

WSC

1x2

048

kbit/

s1+

1

DSC

4x6

4 kb

it/s

1+1

Rem

ote

Han

dset

0.3-

3.4

kHz

Han

dset

0.3-

3.4

kHz

64 k

bit/s

1+1

Nor

th64

kbi

t/s1+

1 Ea

st

EO

W b

ranc

h

Logi

c

64 k

bit/s

1+1

East

64 k

bit/s

1+1

Nor

th

Rem

ote

Han

dset

0.3-

3.4

kHz

Han

dset

0.3-

3.4

kHz

DC

CR/D

1

Pro

zess

or

MU

X

EC

C/

64kb

it/s

Q In

terfa

ceR

S485

LAN

- Int

erfa

ce10

Base

T

ECC

Gat

eway

Mod

ule,

alte

rnat

ivel

y to

QD

2 M

odul

e

A B

HD

LC-

Con

trolle

rQ

Inte

rface

RS4

85

F- In

terfa

ceR

S232

OH

AIC

DC

CR/

DC

CM

EAST

Assignment acc. to QD2 Module

Page 93: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-53

4.9.2 Service channels and connection options

The following table gives an overview of the service channels and connection options available in thesystem. Internal ports are wired directly via the backplane of the OHA Unit.

Table 1 : Overview of service channels and ports

Operating mode

Module Servicechannel Transmission capacity Ports

1+0

1+1

TX1+

0

RX1

+0

2+0

E1 64 kbit/s synchronous external G.703EOW#1 internal � � � � -

F1 64 kbit/s synchron external G.703EOW#2 internal � � � � -

DSC1 64 kbit/s plesiochronous external G.703QTN2 internal � � � � -

DSC2-4 64 kbit/s plesiochronous external G.703 � � � � -

SOH Access

WSC 1x2 Mbit/s2x2 Mbit/s

plesiochronousplesiochronous

external G.703 �

-�

-�

-�

--�

E2 1x64 kbit/s2x64 kbit/s

synchronoussynchronous

external V.11 �

-�

-�

-�

--�

DCCR 192 kbit/s synchronous ECC Gateway internal

� � � � -

SOH Extension

DCCM 576 kbit/s synchronous ECC Gateway internal

� � � � -

DSC1 64 kbit/s plesiochronous external G.703EOW#1 internalEOW#2 internalQTN2 internal

� � � � -

DSC2-4 64 kbit/s plesiochronous external G.703 � � � � -

DSC5-8(optional)

64 kbit/s plesiochronous external G.703 � � � � -

RFCOH Access

WSC 1x2 Mbit/s2x2 Mbit/s

plesiochronousplesiochronous

external G.703 �

-�

-�

-�

--�

Page 94: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-54

Protection types for service channels

Only in microwave radio 1+1 equipment protection and 1+1 line protection configurations without OT (withone DPU/RPS STM-1), service channels are also protected by the radio protection configuration.Depending on the type of protection switching configuration, service channels can be protected byconfiguring the associated modules as defined in Table 2 below. This service channel protectionswitching process is not hitless.

Meaning of the different configuration options:� 1+0: The service channel is not protected.� 1+1: The service channel is protected.� TX1+0: The service channel is not protected on the Tx side and protected on the Rx side.� RX1+0: The service channel is not protected on the Rx side and protected on the Tx side.� 2+0: SC-OP and SC-PR transmit two independent unprotected service channel signals.

The protection channel (PR) for the STM-1 signal is not automatically used as protection channel forservice channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels are transmitted in OP1 (SC-OP)and OP2 (SC-PR).

Service channel operating modes

SOH AccessModule

RFCOH AccessModule

SOH Ext.Module

Vers

ion

ofD

PU Microwave RadioMode

1+0

TX1+

0

RX1

+0

1+1

2+0

1+0

TX1+

0

RX1

+0

1+1

2+0

1+0

2+0

1+0 � - - - - � - - - - � -

n+0, n > 1 � � � � � � � � � � � �

1+1 line protection w/oOT

� � � � - � � � � � � -

1+1 line protection wOT

� - - - - � � � � � � -

A001

n+m line protection � � � � � � � � � � � �

1+1 line protection w/oOT

�2 - - -1 - � � � � � � -

A0021+1 equipmentprotection

�1 - - -1 - � �

3�

2�

2 - � -

Table 2: Protection options for service channels

2 The microwave radio protection switching configuration protects the service channels in such a way thata 1+0 SOH configuration corresponds to a 1+1 configuration.3 This RFCOH configuration is theoretically possible. However, it makes no sense since there is only oneRF channel.

Page 95: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-55

OHAU

This command opens the OHAU configuration window.

Note:

With the exception of the "RFCOH Access (East)", all modules of the OHAU are accessed in the networkelement WEST.When operated as repeater station, the network element EAST has its own OHAU display via which the"RFCOH Access (East)" module and the "SISA-0/N" module assigned to the NE EAST can be accessed.

Page 96: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-56

4.9.3 OHAU power supply

No configuration possible.

Page 97: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-57

4.9.4 RFCOH Access Module

RFCOH access

Management

Configuration

The PR protection channel for the STM-1 signal is not always the protection channel for theservice channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels (1+1 protected) are transmitted in OP1 and OP2.

General

Mode

4x64 kbit/sIndicates the selected service channels. In addition to the 2048 kbit/s WSC, the RFCOH modulealso transmits four codirectional 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703(120 Ohm).

8x64 kbit/sIndicates the selected service channels. In addition to the 2048 kbit/s WSC, the RFCOH modulealso transmits eight codirectional 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703(120 Ohm).

WSC interface

BalancedIndicates the selected interface. The interface of the 2048 kbit/s service channel has animpedance of 120 Ohm at the Sub-D connector.

CoaxialIndicates the selected interface. The interface of the 2048 kbit/s service channel has an impedance of 75 Ohm at connector 1.6/5.6.

Page 98: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-58

Key word 4-27: Selecting RFCOH with 4x64 k

DSC 1....4

� DSC1...DSC4Activation of four digital 64 kbit/s service channels.

Key word 4-28: DSC1 assignment in the RFCOH: EOW, QTN or External

DSC1 interfaceThe digital service channel in the RFCOH can be internally switched to other modules or interfaces.

ExternalAn external 64 kbit/s signal can be applied to DSC1.

QTN2DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of the Q-module.

EOW1DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of EOW module #1.

EOW2DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of EOW module #2.

Page 99: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-59

Key word 4-29: Defining the RFCOH 4x64 k protection switching option

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options for DSC1...DSC4:

1+0No protection of service channel signals.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-30: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 4x64 k

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 100: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-60

Key word 4-31: Selecting RFCOH with 8x64 k

DSC 5...8

DSC5...DSC8Activation of the four additional digital 64 kbit/s service channels.

Key word 4-32: Defining protection switching options for RFCOH 8x64 k

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options for DSC5...DSC8.

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 101: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-61

Key word 4-33: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 8x64 k

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 102: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-62

Key word 4-34: Activating the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH

WSC

NoneSelection of no 2048 kbit/s service channel.

OPTransmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1.

OP+PRIndependent transmission in the operating and protection channel.

Key word 4-35: Defining the 2048 k WSC protection switching option in the RFCOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options for the 2048 kbit/s WSC.

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channel is protected.

Page 103: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-63

Key word 4-36: Selecting the alarm display of the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 104: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-64

4.9.4.1 RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

Key word 4-37: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

Jumper positions on the RFCOH module for the 75 Ohm operating mode.

Fig. 4-7: RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

X100X300

X100X303

X100X301

X100X302

8 1

Page 105: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-65

4.9.4.2 RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

Key word 4-38: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

Jumper positions on the RFCOH module for the 120 Ohm operating mode.

Fig. 4-8: RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

X100X300

X100X303

X100X301

X100X302

8 1

Page 106: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-66

4.9.5 EOW module

For detailed information on how to operate the service unit, please refer to the Operator Manual for theDE-2 Service Unit, Ident. no. AN00035433, and to the annex, chapter 16, of these Operating Instructions.

EOW#1

Management

Configuration

Key word 4-39: Selecting 2/6-wire PSTN inteface of the EOW

Equipment

� PSTN2Indicates whether the 2-wire PSTN port to the PABX is available/not available.

� PSTN6Indicates whether the 6-wire PSTN port (E&M) to the PABX is available/not available.

� BranchingIndicates whether the EOW branching module for a third direction is available/not available.

Page 107: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-67

Key word 4-40: Transmitting or blocking the EOW

General

� Analog interfaceSelection of the external analog interface.

� Connection to local phoneInternal analog connection enabled.

Key word 4-41: Defining the clock source of the EOW

Clock synchronization

WestThe signal coming from the West direction is used for synchronization purposes.

EastThe signal coming from the East direction is used for synchronization purposes.

Internal crystalThe internal crystal is used for synchronization purposes.

Connection

Western

SOH AccessThe EOW is connected to the SOH.

RFCOH AccessThe EOW is connected to the RFCOH.

NoneNo transmission.

Eastern

SOH AccessThe EOW is connected to the SOH.

RFCOH AccessThe EOW is connected to the RFCOH.

External digital channelThe EOW is connected to the interface for an external digital service channel.

NoneNo transmission.

Northern

activeThe North interface is active.

inactiveThe North interface is inactive.

Page 108: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-68

Key word 4-42: Defining the level of the PSTN port

PSTN2

LevelLevel settings for the interface to the PABX.

Rx -7...-13 dBmTx 0...-6 dBm

Amplification (busy tone identification)Selectable amplification to the PABX.

10 / 20 dB

Key word 4-43: Selecting the clock source for EOW branching

Branching

The EOW branching module provides a branch in a third direction.

Clock synchronizationSelectable clock sources for the analog port.

InternalThe own crystal is used for synchronization purposes.

NorthThe signal coming from North is used as synchronization clock source.

Page 109: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-69

4.9.6 QTN module

QTN2

Management

Configuration

Key word 4-44: Configuring QD2/SISA-K

General

NOTE:For detailed information on the individual operating modes, please refer to the "SISA-DCN", document no.62.1013.600.05-A001, and to "SISA in microwave radio", Ident. no. AN 00042537.

Operating mode

Bus service, head stationThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 bus.

Bus service relay/terminal stationThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 bus.

Automatic ring, ring startThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a single SISA-K/R.

Automatic ring, ring memberThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a single SISA-K/R.

Page 110: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-70

SISA-K-controlled ring, master WestThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/Rring router.

SISA-K-controlled ring, master EastThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/R ring router.

SISA-K-controlled ring slaveThis mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/R ring router.

Within a configuration, all QTN modules must be set to an operating mode which can be selected from anappropriate group (bus, automatic ring, SISA-K controlled ring).In bus or automatic ring configurations, one QTN must be adjusted as head station or ring start.All other QTNs of the configuration must be adjusted as relay/terminal station or ring members.In SISA-K-controlled configurations, one Master West and one Master East is required at the site whereSISA-K is used as ring router. The other QTNs must be adjusted as ring slaves.

Depending on the QTN mode adjusted, the following settings should be performed:

1) QTN mode

Bus service, head stationAutomatic ring, ring startSISA-K-controlled ring, master WestSISA-K-controlled ring, master East

� SISA-K/R setting

A set to Microwave radio interfaceD set to Local interface

2) QTN mode

Bus service, relay/terminal stationAutomatic ring, ring memberSISA-K-controlled ring, slave

� SISA-K/R setting

A set to Local interfaceD set to Microwave radio interface

Also see 4.6.8 SISA-K/R.

Page 111: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-71

Interface configuration

Defines the routing of QTN logic interfaces East and West to the physical interfaces A and B.The physical interface A is the internal interface to an SOH channel in the RF link.The physical interface B may either be a 64 kbit/s interface to G.703 / V.11 on the connecting panel or aninternal link to an SOH channel in the baseband.

In the Bus service Relay/Terminal station, Automatic ring, Ring member or SISA-K controlled ring,Slave modes, set QTN to:

Standard (West �� A , B �� East)Select this option if the physical interface A-points to any interface of the bus-controlled QTN (bus configuration);-points to the East interface of the ring-controlled QTN (automatic ring configuration);-points to the Master West (SISA-K-controlled ring).

Reverse (West �� B , A �� East)Select this option if the physical interface B-points to any interface of the bus-controlled QTN (bus configuration);-points to the East interface of the ring-controlled QTN (automatic ring configuration);-points to the Master West (SISA-K-controlled ring).

In the Bus service, head station mode, set QTN to:

Standard (West �� A , B �� East)Select this option if both logic interfaces West and East are active (system supports twobus branches).Select this option if only the logic interface East is active and shall be routed via the physical interface B.

Reverse (West �� B , A �� East)Select this option if only the logic interface East is active and shall be routed via the physical interface A.

� Parts of V.11Select this option, if at least one section of the configuration uses V.11 interfaces of the QTN. All QTNs or equivalent components (SSTK-1 or SISA-K3/T modules) included in the configuration should be set to the same value (all ON or all OFF).

Active interfaceSelection of the active interface.

� A� B

Page 112: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-72

Key word 4-45: Selecting the 64-k transmission channel for the Q-signal

Interface A

Operating modeDefines the data channel to be used for Q transmission to the radio side.

RFCOH (DSC1)The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH.

SOH (DSC1)The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH.

� Normal operation: Transmission in DSC1.

Interface B

Operating modeDefines the data channel to be used for Q transmission to the line side.

External contradirectionalThe Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in an external contradirectional 64 kbit/s DSC.

External codirectionalThe Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in an external codirectional 64 kbit/s DSC.

RFCOH (DSC1)The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH.

SOH (DSC1)The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH.

� Normal operation: Transmission in DSC1.

Page 113: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-73

4.9.7 ECC Gateway module

ECC Gateway

Management

Configuration

ECC

Key word 4-46: Configuring the ECC Gateway Module

General

NOTE:For more detailed information on the different operating modes, please refer to the documents "SISA-DCN", Doc. no.: 62.1013.600.05-A001 and "SISA in microwave radio technology", Ident no. AN00042537.

Indication LAN alarm ON

If this box is check-marked, a "No LAN connection" alarm is displayed.

West

Indication ECC alarm ON

If this box is check-marked, the "ECC transmission disturbed" alarm is activated on the West orEast side.

Page 114: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-74

Operating mode

Defines the data channel to be used for transmitting the Q-channel.

DCCThe Q-channel in transmitted in the DCC (DCCR or DCCM).

Setting DCC

Utilization of transmission channels (display)

OPOperating channel OP

PRProtection channel PR

Selection DCC

Utilization of service channels (display)

DCCRUtilization of the DCC in the RSOH (D1-D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.

DCCMUtilization of the DCC in the MSOH (D4-D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.

Page 115: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-75

4.9.8 ECC Gateway module - addresses

ECC Gateway

Management

Configuration

Adresses

Operating mode

Q3pThe local NE is connected to the SOA via the LAN interface. For this purpose, the OSIprotocol stack is used (SISA-O). Remote NEs are connected to the local NE via theECC and can therefore also be controlled by the SOA.

QD2-IPThe local NE is connected via the LAN interface to the SOA. For this purpose, theTCP/IP protocol stack is used (SISA-I). Remote NEs are connected to the local NE viathe ECC and can therefore also be controlled by the SOA.

QD2-SISA-VThe NE includes a SISA-V used for communication with further NEs. These NEs areconnected to SISA-V via the ECC. The NE itself acts as a QD2 Slave, i.e. it isconnected to a RS485 bus.

QD2-SISA-V-IPThe NE includes a SISA-V used for communication with further NEs. These NEs areconnected to SISA-V via the ECC. The NE itself is directly connected to the SOA viathe LAN interface. For this purpose, the TCP/IP protocol stack is used (SISA-I).

QD2-via-SISA-VThe NE is connected via the ECC to a NE with SISA-V operated in the QD2-SISA-Vmode. This operating mode is provided for cases where other SISA transport paths toa remote NE do not exist. Up to 29 NEs can be connected via SISA-V. The NEs areidentified by their SISA node number. Using the SISA-V Gateway address, the NE isselected to which the remote NE shall set up a connection.

SOASISA-O

SOASISA-O

SOASISA-I

SOASISA-I

LAN

LAN

LAN

LAN

Local NEQ3p

Local NEQ3p

Local NEQD2-IP

Local NE QD2-SISA-V-IP

RS485

ECC

ECC

Remote NEQ3p

Remote NEQD2-via-SISA-V

Local NE QD2-SISA-V

Remote NEQD2-via-SISA-V

ECC

Page 116: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-76

4.9.8.1 Q3p operating mode

Internet addresses

An Internet address of a network management system is required for the Q3p interface. When using asecond, i.e. redundant computer, the Internet address of the latter must also be communicated to the NE.The Internet address is 32 bits long and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots. Each 8-bitsection represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).

SOAInternet address of a network management computer.0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

red. SOAInternet address of a redundant network management computer.0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Page 117: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-77

TCP/IP connection to network element

It is possible to log on to a network element via TCP. For this purpose the NE is assigned an Internetaddress composed of the IP address, the IP subnet mask as well as the IP address of a default router.

IP addressUnambiguous IP address of the network element within a network (Internet/Intranet)0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Subnet maskMask for part of the IP address0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Default GatewayIP address of the default router0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

TSAP IDs

The Transport Service Access Point Identification (TSAP ID) is part of the transport address for the OSIlayer 4 (transport layer).The transport layer offers protected, transparent data transmission between terminals. It also offers end-to-end error monitoring, sequentialization of data and flux control.The TSAP ID is 16 bits long and is composed of two 8-bit section separated by a dot. Each 8-bit sectionrepresents 256 numbers (0 to 255). On address assignment, please note that the same address must notbe used several times.

QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)

SISA node no.SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Master.0...254

NE connect. no. (SOA)Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master.0...254

NE connect. no. (red. SOA)Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master.0...254

Page 118: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-78

Layer-3 addresses

The Layer-3 address (OSI-L3 address) is required for setting up a transmission link between the SOA andNE, for the remote logon from one NE to another and for OSI routing. The OSI-L3 address is also referredto as NSAP (Network Service Access Point).In most cases of application, the OSI-L3 address of the NE is generated automatically from the NEmanufacturing no. (automatic mode). In this case, further settings in the "Layer-3 addresses" dialog arenot necessary.

If the NE shall be operated in third-party networks, it may be necessary to adjust an OSI-L3 addressmanually (manual mode). In order to avoid malfunctions, both the addressing scheme and the individualaddresses must be provided and carefully administered by the network operator. OSI Layer-3 addressesshould comply with the ISO 8348/Add.2 standard.

Mode

automaticAutomatic address assignment adjusted.

manualManual address assignment adjusted.

Routing level

A Routing Domain is divided up into individual areas.

An End System (ES) can only transmit or receive messages. The SOA can be an ES. The networkelements are Intermediate Systems (IS) which are also appropriate to pass on messages (routingfunction).

A Level-1 router can route only within its own area. If a Level-1 router receives a message determined foranother area, this message is passed on to the nearest Level-2 router. If there is no Level-2 router in theown area, the message is discarded.

A Level-2 router does not only know the IS and ES of its own area but als the Level-2 routers located inthe other areas. If a message is determined for another area, it is passed on by the Level-2 router of thesource area to the Level-2 router of the destination area (if necessary via several Level-2 routers).An area can also include several Level-2 routers. Level-2 routing between Level-2 routers is possible onlyif the corresponding Level-2 routers are directly interconnected (i.e. no via Level-1 routers).

IS type

Level 1Level-1 router

Level 2Level-2 router

Page 119: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-79

Structure of the OSI Layer-3 address

The OSI Layer-3 address is composed of three parts, i.e. the Area address, System ID and NSAPselector.The Area address is used to address the sub-network to which the NE belongs.In the example below, addresses of the "ANSI NSAP address format" are used (AFI 39, IDI=ISODCC=840F [USA], DFI=80).Area address: 39000080000000000000000000The second part of the address (System ID) represents an unambiguous System Identifier which isunique in the entire Routing Domain.

Example: 96F100120000In the hexadecimal format, this address corresponds to Internet address "150.248.0.18".The third part of the address is the NSAP selector. It selects the transport layer as Layer-3 user. It isalways 01.On activation of the "manual" Layer-3 addressing mode, the automatic address assignment is excludedfrom the manufacturing number. In this case, a remote logon from the Operator Terminal is usually nolonger possible (only local logon).

Length NSAP4...20

Length Sys ID1...8

NSAP NENSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP NE (add.)NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOANSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOA (red.)NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

Page 120: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-80

4.9.8.2 QD2-IP operating mode

Internet addresses

For the TCP/IP interface, the Internet address of a network management computer is required. If aredundant computer is available, its address must also be known to the NE.The Internet address has a length of 32 bits and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots.Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).

SOAInternet address of a network mangement computer0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Red. SOAInternet address of a redundant network management computer0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Page 121: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-81

TCP/IP connection to the network element

IP addressUnambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet)0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Subnet maskMask for part of the IP address0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Default GatewayIP address of the default router0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

TSAP IDs

QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)SISA node no.

SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Master0...254

NE access no. (SOA)Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master0...254

NE access no. (red. SOA)Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master0...254

Layer-3 addresses

ModeAutomatic

Automatic address assignment adjusted.Manual

Manual address assignment adjusted.

IS typeLevel 1

Level-1 routerLevel 2

Level-2 router

Length NSAP4...20

Length Sys ID1...8

NSAP NENSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP NE (add.)NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOANSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOA (Red.)NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

Page 122: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-82

4.9.8.3 QD2-SISA-V operating mode

TCP/IP connection to network element

IP addressUnambiguous IP address of the NE within a network (Internet/Intranet)0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Subnet maskMask for part of the IP address0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Default GatewayIP address of the default router0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Page 123: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-83

Operating modeThe SISA node no. for VMP01 corresponds to the SISA node no. of the Master in the Q3p andQD2-via-SISA-V modes. However, it can also differ from it due to this setting possibility.

SISA node no. for VMP011...30

Layer-3 addresses

ModeAutomatic

Automatic address assignment adjusted.Manual

Manual address assignment adjusted.

IS typeLevel 1

Level-1 routerLevel 2

Level-2 router

Length NSAP4...20

Length Sys ID1...8

NSAP NENSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP NE (add.)NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOANSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOA (Red.)NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

Page 124: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-84

4.9.8.4 QD2-SISA-V-IP operating mode

TCP/IP connection to the network element

IP addressUnambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet)0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Subnet maskMask for part of the IP address0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Default GatewayIP address of the default router0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Internet addresses

For the TCP/IP interface, the Internet address of a network management computer is required. If aredundant computer is available, its address must also be known to the NE.The Internet address has a length of 32 bits and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots.Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).

Page 125: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-85

SOAInternet address of a network mangement computer0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Red. SOAInternet address of a redundant network management computer0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

TSAP IDs

The Transport Service Access Point Identification (TSAP ID) is part of the transport address for the OSIlayer 4 (transport layer).The transport layer offers protected, transparent data transmission between terminals. It also offers end-to-end error monitoring, sequentialization of data and flux control.The TSAP ID is 16 bits long and is composed of two 8-bit section separated by a dot. Each 8-bit sectionrepresents 256 numbers (0 to 255). On address assignment, please note that the same address must notbe used several times.

QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)NE access no. (SOA)

Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master0...254

NE access no. (red. SOA)Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master0...254

Operating modeThe SISA node no. for VMP01 corresponds to the SISA node no. of the Master in the Q3p, QD2-IP,QD2-via-SISA-V and QD2-SISA-V-IP modes. However, it can also differ from it due to this settingpossibility.

SISA node no. for VMP011...30

Layer-3 addresses

ModeAutomatic

Automatic address assignment adjusted.Manual

Manual address assignment adjusted.

IS typeLevel 1

Level-1 routerLevel 2

Level-2 router

Length NSAP4...20

Length Sys ID1...8

NSAP NENSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP NE (add.)NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOANSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format

NSAP SOA (Red.)NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

Page 126: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-86

4.9.8.5 QD2-via-SISA-V operating modes

TCP/IP connection to the network element

IP addressUnambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet)0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Subnet maskMask for part of the IP address0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Default GatewayIP address of the default router0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

Page 127: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-87

SISA-V Gateway address

The SISA-V Gateway address is used to set up the control connection to remote NEs. The remote NEcommunicates with the Gateway NE via the ECC. The address used is the OSI address (see RID ornameplate of subrack).

SISA-V Gateway addressSISA-V Gateway address in hexadecimal format.

TSAP IDs

QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)

SISA node no.SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Agent or SISA-V.0...254

Layer-3 addresses

ModeAutomatic

Automatic address assignment adjustedManual

Manual address assignment adjusted

IS type

Level 1Level-1 router

Level 2Level-2 router

Length of NSAP4...20

Length of Sys ID1...8

NSAP NENSAP of the NE displayed in hexadecimal form

NSAP NE (add.)NSAP of the additional NE displayed in hexadecimal form

NSAP SOANSAP of SOA displayed in hexadecimal form

NSAP SOA (red.)NSAP of redundant SOA displayed in hexadecimal form

Page 128: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-88

4.9.9 ECC Gateway Module - IP Routing

ECC Gateway

Administration

Configuration

IP routing

IP routing table

An IP router is used to interconnect several IP sub-networks. The transfer of an IP packet based on the IPdestination address is referred to as IP routing. The router fulfills the task of passing on an incoming IPpacket within a compound of several networks in an optimum way. For this purpose, it receives a tablecontaining all data relevant for passing on IP packets received. This table is referred to as Routing Table.

PositionPosition of routing entry in the table. Up to ten entries are possible. If the table is empty, itcontains no entries.

DestinationIP address of the route destination.The network destination can be a sub-network or a computer (host). If the destination is a sub-network, this column displays the sub-network ID of the destination sub-network. If the networkdestination is a computer, this column displays the IP address of the destination computer.0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

GatewayIP address of the Gateway located on the way to the route destination.0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

NetmaskMask for part of the IP address of the route destination. The sub-netmask is used to determinethe sub-network in which a host is located.0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

ActiveIf this box is check-marked, the associated route is active (indicated in the routing table),otherwise it is inactive (contained in the MDB only).

To add a routeClick any line in the table to add a route. Then choose the 'Add' button. A window appears andrequests you to enter the IP addresses of the route to be added. If the line is highlighted, thenew route is added above the corresponding line, otherwise it will be added below it.

To delete a routeSelect the route to be deleted by clicking it in the table. Then choose the 'Delete' button. Thehighlighted line disappears and all entries below it will move up by one position.

To edit a routeSelect the route to be edited by clicking it in the table. Then choose the 'Edit' button. A windowappears and requests you to enter the IP addresses of the route to be modified.

Page 129: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-89

4.9.10 SOH Access Module

SOH access

Management

Configuration

General

� Check data continuouslyThe data are continuously updated.

� SOH extension equippedIndicates whether the SOH extension module is available/not available. The SOH extension module provides access to additional bytes (E2, DCCR and DCCM) in the SOH.

Page 130: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-90

Key word 4-47: Selecting the 2048 k WSC interface in the SOH

WSC West interface

BalancedIndicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120 Ohmat a Sub-D connector.

CoaxialIndicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75 Ohmat a 1.6/5.6 connector.

WSC East interface

BalancedIndicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120 Ohmat the Sub-D connector.

CoaxialIndicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75 Ohmat the 1.6/5.6 connector.

Backplane versionIndicates the installed backplane version.

A01...A16

Key word 4-48: DPU STM-1 address

DPU addressIndicates the addresses of the DPUs whose radio channel is used to transmit the respective2048 kbit/s service channel.

0 = no DPU connected1...16=DPU OP1...OP16, 17=DPU PR1, 18=DPU PR2

OP East

1...18

PR East

1...18

OP West

1...18

PR West

1...18

Page 131: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-91

Key word 4-49: Selecting 4x64k service channels West in the SOH

DSC West

� DSC1...DSC4Activation of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.

DSC1 interface

externalAccess to an external 64 kbit/s service channel.

QTNThe QTN signal is transmitted in the DSC1.

Key word 4-50: Selecting RPS options for 4x64 k West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signaltransmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 132: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-92

Key word 4-51: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k West in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 133: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-93

Key word 4-52: Selecting 4x64k service channels East in the SOH

DSC East

� DSC1...DSC4Activation of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.

DSC1 interface

externalAccess to an external 64 kbit/s service channel.

QTN2 The QTN signal is transmitted in DSC1.

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 134: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-94

Key word 4-53: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k East in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 135: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-95

Key word 4-54: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH

WSC West

WSC

NoneNo WSC selected.

OPTransmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1.

OP+PRIndependent transmission in operating and protection channel. Both channels are unprotected.

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channel is protected.

Page 136: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-96

Key word 4-55: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 137: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-97

Key word 4-56: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH

WSC East

WSC

NoneNo WSC selected.

OPTransmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1.

OP+PRIndependent transmission in operating and protection channel. Both channels are unprotected.

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channel is protected.

Page 138: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-98

Key word 4-57: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

� Send LA Tx in case of LOSThe module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 139: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-99

Key word 4-58: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

E1 West

� E1 equippedThe E1 byte is used.

E1 interface

EOW#1The E1 byte is used for a EOW module #1.

externalThe E1 byte is used for an external service channel.

Key word 4-59: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 140: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-100

Key word 4-60: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 141: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-101

Key word 4-61: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

E1 East

� E1 equippedThe E1 byte is used.

E1 interface

EOW#1The E1 byte is used for EOW module #1.

externalThe E1 byte is used for an external service channel.

Key word 4-62: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 142: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-102

Key word 4-63: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 143: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-103

Key word 4-64: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

F1 West

� F1 equippedThe F1 byte is used.

E1 interface

EOW#2The F1 byte is used for EOW module #2.

externalThe F1 byte is used for an external service channel.

Key word 4-65: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 144: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-104

Key word 4-66: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 145: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-105

Key word 4-67: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

F1 East

� F1 equippedThe F1 byte is used.

E1 interface

EOW#2The F1 byte is used for EOW module #2.

externalThe F1 byte is used for an external service channel.

Key word 4-68: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Page 146: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-106

Key word 4-69: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 147: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-107

4.9.10.1 SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

Key word 4-70: Setting SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

Jumper positions on the SOH Access Module for adjusting the 75 Ohm operating mode.

Fig. 4-9: SOH Access Module Interface 75 Ohm

X100X100

X100X101

X100X102

X100X104

X100X401

X100X403

X100X404

X100X405

8 1 8 1

Page 148: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-108

4.9.10.2 SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

Key word 4-71: Setting SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

Jumper positions on the SOH Access Module for adjusting the 120 Ohm operating mode.

Fig. 4-10: SOH Access Module Interface 120 Ohm

X100X100

X100X101

X100X102

X100X104

X100X401

X100X403

X100X404

X100X405

8 1 8 1

Page 149: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-109

4.9.11 SOH Extension Module

SOH extension

Management

Configuration

Key word 4-72: Occupying 64-k service channel D1 West in the SOH

D1 West

ChannelOnly internal service channels.

DCCRUse of the DCC in the RSOH (D1 to D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.

DCCMUse of the DCC in the MSOH (D4 to D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.

NoneNo service channel selected.

Page 150: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-110

Key word 4-73: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The service channels on the Rx side are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The service channels on the Tx side are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-74: Selecting the alarm display for DCC service channel West in the SOH

Page 151: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-111

Key word 4-75: Occupying the DCC service channel East in the SOH

D1 East

ChannelOnly internal service channels.

DCCRUse of the DCC in the RSOH (D1 to D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.

DCCMUse of the DCC in the MSOH (D4 to D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.

NoneNo service channel selected.

Page 152: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-112

Channel redundancy switchingSelectable protection switching options:

1+0No protection of the service channel signal.

Rx 1+0The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

Tx 1+0The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).

1+1The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-76: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel East in the SOH

Page 153: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-113

Key word 4-77: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

E2 West

Key word 4-78: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

E2The E2 service channel is available at the external interface (V.11).

noneNo service channel E2 selected.

PRTransmission in the protection channel.

OPTransmission in the operating channel.

OP+PRTransmission in the operating and protection channel.

Key word 4-79: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 154: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-114

Key word 4-80: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH

E2 East

Key word 4-81: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH

E2The E2 service channel is available at the external interface (V.11).

noneNo service channel E2 selected.

PRTransmissin in the protection channel.

OPTransmission in the operating channel.

OP+PRTransmission in the operating and protection channel.

Key word 4-82: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k serv. channel E2 West in the SOH

Tx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Rx direction

� Send AIS in case of LOSThe module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.

� Send AIS if AIS is receivedThe module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

Page 155: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-115

4.9.12 SISA-0/N

SISA0-N

Management

Configuration

Terminal

RedundancyDetermines the protection switching mode of the system. This setting is decisive for the correct mapping of the QD2 information model onto functional groups.Modifications become active only after a SISA-0/N reset.In the regenerator mode (two terminals mounted back to back) with one OHAU, the operating mode must be adjusted both in the WEST terminal and EAST terminal.

noneNo protection selected; operating mode N+0.

Equipment protectionEquipment protection (1+1 HSB) with one DPU STM-1 A002.

Line protection (1xDPU, 2x radio w/o occasional traffic)1+1 line protection switching with only one DPU STM-1 A002.Occasional traffic (OT) and XPIC operation are not possible.

Line protection (n+m w/o occasional traffic)Line protection switching without occasional traffic;with RPSC/RPSI.

Line protection (n+m with occasional traffic)Line protection switching with occasional traffic;with RPSC/RPSI.

Page 156: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-116

4.9.13 SISA-K/R

SISA-0

Display

Page 157: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-117

Settings

Configuration

NOTE:For detailed information on the configuration, please refer to the "SISA in microwave radio" OperatorManual, Ident. no. AN 00042537.

Config

OSI 3 addressThis is the address of the SISA bus. If the address is 0, SISA-K/R does not respond to callsfrom the higher-order master element.

0...30

W/E Switch AddressThis value specifies the switchover address for the polling process. The selected value defines the network address up which the SISA-KR bus master is polling. Address n+1 and higher addresses are then polled by bus master East. Value 0 indicates that all network elements connected are polled by bus master East, while value 30 indicates that all elements are polled by bus master West.

0...30

Page 158: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-118

Port A

Protocol Primary (Master)

Mode OSI 1

RS 485V.11/YV.11/X.24G.703G.703-RFG.703-G.703G.703-V.11V.11-G.703V.11-V.11

Bit RateThe following transmission rates can be selected:

1.2 kbit/s2.4 kbit/s4.8 kbit/s9.6 kbit/s19.2 kbit/s64 kbit/s

Operat. Mode

BusPoint/PointRingDoublingRouterTwo way

Interface

LCNDCN

Timeout Primary

StandardExtended

Page 159: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-119

Delay Primary

3...5 ms1...3 ms

Priority Cycle

OnOff

Poll Cycle

StandardOptimized

UI Interval

1 s2.5 s5 s7.5 s

Page 160: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-120

Port D

Protocol Secondary (Slave)

Mode OSI 1

RS 485V.11/YV.11/X.24G.703G.703-RFG.703-G.703G.703-V.11V.11-G.703V.11-V.11

Bit RateThe following transmission rates can be selected.

1.2 kbit/s2.4 kbit/s4.8 kbit/s9.6 kbit/s19.2 kbit/s64 kbit/s

Operat. Mode

BusPoint/PointRingDoubling

Interface

LCNDCN

Page 161: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-121

Port F

Protocol Secondary (Slave)

Mode OSI 1

RS232

Bit Rate

960019.2 k

Operat. Mode

Point/Point

Parity

UnkownNoneEvenOdd

Byte Distance

Unkown5 ms10 ms15 ms20 ms

Page 162: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-122

Selection for Port A / Port D:

When used together with the QTN module, two port characteristics are relevant:

� Microwave radio interface for SISA-K/R interface points to QTN:

Mode OSI 1: G.703-RF (even if V.11 interface of QTN is used)Bit rate: 64 kbit/sOperating mode: Bus (bus or automatic ring configurations)

Ring (SISA-K-controlled rings)Interface: DCNTimeout Primary: Standard (configurations up to 8 stations)

Extended (configurations with more than 8 stations)

� Local interface for SISA-K/R connected to the local QD2int (pseudo) bus:

Mode OSI 1: RS485Bit rate: 64 kbit/sOperating mode: BusInterface: LCNTimeout Primary: Standard (available only at port A)

Depending on the QTN operating mode, the following settings should be implemented:

1a) QTN

Bus service, head stationAutomatic ring, ring startSISA-K-controlled ring, master WestSISA-K-controlled ring, master East

1b) SISA-K/R

A set to Microwave radio interfaceD set to Local interface

2a) QTN

Bus service, relay/terminal stationAutomatic ring, ring memberSISA-K-controlled ring, slave

2b) SISA-K/R

A set to Local interfaceD set to Microwave radio interface

Page 163: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Configuration

RF/160 OI 4-123

4.9.14 XQI

The XQI application permits station alarms to be passed on to the TMN system.For this purpose, the SISA-0/N module provides eight alarm contacts at connector X117 of an OHAU.These correspond to ME1 channels 1 to 8 in the XQI. These alarm inputs are floating inputs for relaycontacts (NO or NC), door contacts etc..ME1 channels 9 to 32 are not supported.

ME

These eight inputs are configurable in ME-1.

Page 164: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Configuration Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI4-124

ME1

Administration

Configuration

Each of the eight inputs can be selected separately.If a normally open contact (NO) (alarm with contact open) is to be monitored, the alarm polarity must be“Active high“.If a normally closed contact (NC) (alarm with contact closed) is to be monitored, the alarm polarity mustbe “Active Low“.

Page 165: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alignment

RF/160 OI 5-1

5 Alignment5.1 IntroductionTo permit hitless protection switching, the system must be aligned. The alignment process compensatesthe different delays of all channels. Thus, the switch itself receives synchronous data and can switch overfrom one side to the other without any loss of sync. The reference used for calculating the delay is alwaysPR1. The present chapter describes how to align the entire system and how individual channels can bere-aligned. The alignment of a hot standby system will be described at the end of the chapter.Important:

When opening the window for the first time, errors may be displayed (since the system has not yetbeen aligned, there will probably be alignment errors). The alignment must be performed using STM-1signals without AIS. Otherwise this process will be interrupted. Ensure that no channel is injecting orreceiving an AIS signal. Also ensure that the channels are not blocked. For the alignment process, the"Automatic" setting option for protection switching must be active for all operating channels. Protectionchannels must be sent to "Occasional traffic (OT) - loose" or "No occasional traffic (OT)".After an alignment or test process, the protection switching configuration of the system must bechecked, because operating channels might be set to "Automatic off".

5.2 DisplayTwo different display modes are available, i.e. a graphical and a tabular display. Using the "Display"menu item, it is possible to switch over between these two display modes.

Both displays are subject to the following rules:� blue = transmit-side and receive-side protection switching link� green = active transmission (OP or PR)� red = faulty transmission� white = input box

Page 166: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alignment Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI5-2

Graphical displayThe graphical display shows the individual transmission links sorted according to operating and protectionchannels. The transmit side (far end) is depicted on the left, the receive side with the local port on theright side.Depending on the system expansion, two N to 1 multiplexers (RPS-C, Radio Protection Switching) can beused to switch the operating channels to one protection channels. This is indicated by the verticalconnecting lines and colors. A mark at the crossing point shows the multiplexer switching status.If a channel is available, the alarm data are displayed in the first column. Otherwise, the backgroundremains dark grey.

Tabular displayThe tabular display of the alignment mask gives a compact overview of the channels and their statusesThe colors of the individual table cells are sorted according to columns and assigned according to thefollowing scheme:

Channel red Channel failed/disturbed and protection switching failed/disturbedgreen a) Channel OK or

b) Channel failed/disturbed, but protection switching OK

Measuring value red Channel not alignedgreen a) Channel aligned and protection switched or

b) Channel aligned and Tx-side protection switching prepared

PR1/PR2 statusred Channel failed/disturbedgreen Channel aligned and protection switchedblue Channel aligned and Tx-side protection switching prepared

Meaning of alarmsINT-A General alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module.INT-B General alarm "Module faulty" of the associated DPU module.Align Test switchover was not error-free. Channel is not correctly aligned.RPS-AIS The associated DPU receives AIS in the protection switching block

Important:When opening the window for the first time, errors may be displayed (since the system has not yet beenaligned, there will probably be alignment errors).The alignment must be performed using STM-1 signals without AIS. Otherwise this process will becancelled. Ensure that no channel is injecting or receiving an AIS signal.

Also verify that no channel is locked. During the alignment process, the "Automatic" option must be activefor all operating channels; protection channels must be set to "loose OT" or "no OT".After an alignment or test process, check the protection switching configuration of the system to ensurethat operating channels are not set to "Automatic OFF".

Page 167: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alignment

RF/160 OI 5-3

5.3 Overall alignmentThe overall alignment process can be started by clicking on the Settings | Align all menu items.The following request will be displayed:

Click the Yes button to start the alignment process. A status dialog displays which OP is tested withwhich PR all along the process:

If the process has been successfully executed, the following message will be displayed:

By clicking on 'Details', the delays between the PR1 reference channel and other channels will bedisplayed.

Page 168: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alignment Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI5-4

All channels are now aligned and shouldn't display any more alarms:

5.4 Checking alignment data

A test is necessary to check the alignment data. This test can be started by clicking the Setting | Checkall menu items.

The following security request will be displayed:

Choose the Yes button to start the alignment value testing process. A status dialog displays which OP istested with which PR all along the process:

Page 169: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alignment

RF/160 OI 5-5

If the process has been executed successfully, the following message will be displayed:

By clicking on 'Details', the delays between the PR1 reference channel and other channels will bedisplayed. These delays may possibly deviate from those displayed during the alignment process.

All channels are correctly aligned.

5.5 Selective alignmentBy double-clicking the required channel, the following window will be displayed:

This channel can be tested or aligned only using the selected PR. The system protection switching test orsystem alignment is executed by selecting all channels. The 'Enhanced priority' option enables you tooverride the locked configuration of the selected channel(s).

Page 170: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alignment Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI5-6

By double-clicking the delay option, the delay value can be changed (default value: 700 for N+Msystems):

By double-clicking on the right side of the delay box, the following window will be displayed:

OP manual configuration PR manual configuration

For more detailed information, please refer to DPU configuration.

5.6 Hot Standby or 1+1 without occasional traffic

In a 'Hot standby' or '1+1 without occasional traffic' configuration, only one DPU is available. Thealignment memory of this DPU is divided up into 2 parts to create two virtual DPUs (OP1 and PR1).

The default delay value is now 350.The configuration and alignment processes are identical with those of an N+M system.

Page 171: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alignment

RF/160 OI 5-7

5.7 Alignment errorsIf a channel could not be aligned, an error will be displayed. By clicking on 'Details', the errored channelswill display a "couldn't be aligned" message instead of the calculated delay value.

A faulty configuration in the far end (i.e. N+0) can lead to a system failure. In this case, check theprotection switching configuration of the far end and ensure that the N+M protection switching mode, hotstandby option or 1+1 configuration without OT has been selected.

The alignment process is interrupted if at least one of the DPUs detects an AIS on the receive side. In thiscase, an information box will be displayed.

Page 172: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alignment Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI5-8

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 173: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-1

6 Alarms6.1 Standard module alarms

Select the following items

Module...

Alarms

Alarm info

Standard

to activate the standard alarm window for a module (example: transmitter):

This mask represents the status of the standard alarms for all modules. In this conjunction, it is pointedout that - depending on the module type - the individual modules offer only a certain part of the completeset of alarms.

Page 174: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-2

Meaning of alarms:

Clock/Voltage Supply

Faulty power supply Failure of module-internal power supply.This alarm is signalled only for modules with an own power supply.

Fault clock supply Not signalled.

Battery voltage outside nom. range Not signalled.

Battery voltage outside op. range Not signalled.

Module Management

Communication failure Not signalled.

Internal

Module defective The module functioning is affected in such a way that thetransmission of the traffic signal is severely disturbed orinterrupted.This is a general alarm for the module. For more detailedinformation, please refer to module-specific alarms.

Module faulty The module functioning is affected in such a way that the trafficsignal transmitted includes bit errors.

This is a general alarm for the module. For more detailedinformation, please refer to the module-specific alarms.

Hardware defective Hardware fault on the module. In consequence of this alarm, the"Module defective" alarm is also displayed.

Inconsistent configuration There is an inconsistent setting in the software configuration of the module.

Faulty software status Not signalled.

No free memory capacity Not signalled.

Program memory not readable Not signalled.

Data memory not readable Not signalled.

Page 175: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-3

6.2 Transmitter (Tx)Transmitter

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� RF power lowThe minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (+12 dBm for 13 GHz) is undershot by �3 dB.

� IF input signalThe IF signal fails or is not correct.

� ATPC level errorThe nominal value of the RF output power deviates by �3 dB from the actual value.

� Manual operationThe Tx output power control is deactivated.

Page 176: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-4

6.3 TX/RX oscillator

Tx oscillator

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� Local oscillatorFailure of the DRVCO (LO).

� Cross-channel loss of syncLoss of sync of the LO (Slave) caused by the cross-polar transmitter/receiver (Master) inXPIC operation.

Page 177: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-5

6.4 Main receiver

Main receiver

Alarm info

Module family

� LOSThe RF input power at X1 is � -90 dBm.

� Manual operationSweep mode activated in the receiver or manual control of the IF control amplifier.

Page 178: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-6

6.5 Diversity receiver

Div. receiver

Alarm info

Module family

� LOS diversityThe RF input power at X21 is � -90 dBm.

� LOS at combiner inputNo valid IF signal at the IF combiner inputs X23 and X24.

� Manual operationSweep mode activated in the receiver or manual control of the IF control amplifier.

Page 179: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-7

6.6 Modem Unit

6.6.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical

SPI STM-1 EL Electrical STM-1 data interface

EL

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� LOS at inputThe STM-1 signal is missing at the BB input (loss of signal).

� Output signal failsThe STM-1 signal is missing at the BB output.

� Reference clockThe reference clock is not available.

� Code error at inputThe BB input signal includes code errors.

6.6.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical

Page 180: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-8

SPI STM-1 OPT Optical STM-1 data interface

OPT

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� Tx laser power < 70% of SOLThis alarm is displayed if the output power of the Tx laser drops down to 70% of itsinitial power (Start Of Life, SOL) value.

� LOS at inputLoss of signal at the data input.

Page 181: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-9

6.6.3 RPSI STM-1

RPSI STM-1

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� LOS at inputThe STM-1 signal from the RPSC is missing at the input (loss of signal).

� Output signal failsThe STM-1 signal to the RPSC is missing at the RPSI output.

� Reference clockThe reference clock is not available.

� Code error at inputThe STM-1 signal from the RPSC includes code errors.

Page 182: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-10

6.6.4 Modem Unit power supply

Modem unit power supply

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

Supply voltage Net 1Secondary voltage outside nominal voltage range.

� +8.0 V

� +5.2 V

� +3.3 V

� -5.2 V

� -8.0 V

Supply voltage Net 4Secondary voltage outside nominal voltage range.

� +8.0 V

� -8.0 V

Page 183: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-11

6.6.5 Modulator

MD 155/140...

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� No IF output signalLoss of the IF output level.

� Clock signal out of synchronizationThe clock recovery has not locked / is not in sync.

� IF carrier out of synchronizationIn the XPIC mode of the right MD (Slave) in the MU, clock recovery has not locked / is not in sync.

� No IF carrier synchronization signalThe IF carrier signal of the cross-polar MD is not available in XPIC operation.

� General alarm of ASIC for baseband signal codingInternal ASIC alarm.

Page 184: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-12

6.6.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140...

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

64 QAM

� Carrier recoveryThe IF carrier recovery has not locked.

� A/D converter output signalNo valid output signal at the A/D converter.

� Radio clock monitoringNo synchronization possible.

� No IF input signalNo IF input signal at the DM input.

� No FEC synchronizationThe FEC cannot be synchronized to the signal applied.

� Line clock monitoringDetection of an ASIC failure.

� XPIC operation not possibleThis alarm is displayed if XPIC operation has been activated in the MU,but the DM (H, V) is not in sync.

� Elastic buffer overflow of XPEOverflow of the elastic memory for synchronization of the cross-polar signal.

Page 185: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-13

128 QAM

� Carrier recoveryThe IF carrier recovery has not locked.

� A/D converter output signalNo valid output signal at the A/D converter.

� Radio clock monitoringNo synchronization possible.

� No IF signal from other demodulatorMissing IF carrier reference signal from other DM.

� Other demodulator not synchronizedDMs are not synchronized.

� Reset of equalizerA reset of the equalizer has occurred.

� MLC decoder not synchronizedThe MLC decoder is out of sync.

� FIFO pointer collision in MLC decoderA FIFO pointer collision has occurred in the MLC decoder.

� XPIC operation not possibleThis alarm is displayed if XPIC operation has been activated in the MU,but the DM (H, V) is not in sync.

� Elastic buffer overflow of XPEOverflow of the elastic memory for synchronization of the cross-polar signal.

Page 186: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-14

6.6.7 Controller module

No alarms available.

Page 187: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-15

6.6.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit

DPU/RPS STM-1

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

Page 188: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-16

STM-1 Transmission

� Manual interventionThe loopback feature and/or B1 inversion is activeor AIS injection disabled in case of SES(B1).

Line side

� LOSNo correct data signal available at the DPU line side.

� LOF STM-1No STM-1 frame synchronization possible.

� SES (B1)The signal on the line side has a BER �2E-5 (ITU-T G.826).

� J0-TIMThe received path trace signal differs from the one expected (Trace Identifier Mismatch).

Page 189: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-17

Radio side

SES (B1)The signal on the radio side has a BER �2E-5 (ITU-T G.826).

� J0-TIMThe received path trace signal differs from the one expected (Trace Identifier Mismatch).

� Radio hop identifierThe received radio hop identifier differs from the one expected.

� LA Tx receivedA Tx side Line Alarm has been received.

Operating channel

� LOSNo correct data signal is available on the DPU radio side.

� LOF RFCOHNo RFCOH frame synchronization possible.

LOF STM-1No STM-1 frame synchronization possible.

Protection channelFor 1+1 HSB or 1+1 with one DPU STM-1.

� LOSNo correct data signal available on the DPU radio side.

� LOF RFCOHNo RFCOH frame synchronization possible.

LOF STM-1No STM-1 frame synchronization possible.

Page 190: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-18

Protection switching

� Faulty CAN ringThe CAN bus is faulty.

Tx sidePR channel

� LOS (PR from OP)The PR does not receive a correct signal from the line side (RPSI).

� LOF (PR from OP)No STM-1 frame synchronization of the PR possible from the line side (RPSI).

� Number of protection switchovers exceeded thresholdThe number of the Tx protection switching events is higher than the threshold (15 min).

Rx sideOP channel

� LOS (PR from OP)The OP does not receive a correct signal from the line side (RPSI).

� LOF (PR from OP)No STM-1 frame synchronization of the OP possible from the line side (RPSI).

� Alignment OP-PRThe OP and PR are not aligned. No hitless protection switching possible.Should this alarm occur when an already aligned system is switched on, the OP affected must be manually switched over to a PR for a short time. If the alarm does still not disappear, aselective alignment must be performed for the corresponding OP.

� Number of protection switchovers exceeded thresholdThe number of the Rx protection switching events is higher than the threshold adjusted(15 min).

� Protection switching could not be performedNo successful protection switching possible.

Page 191: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-19

6.7 RPSC + RPSH modules

6.7.1 RPSC module

RPS-C

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� Faulty hardware configurationFaulty hardware configuration.

� Power supplyDefective power supply.

� CAN busThe CAN bus is faulty.

Page 192: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-20

6.7.2 RPSH module

RPS-H

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� Power supplyDefective power supply.

� CAN communicationThe CAN bus is faulty.

Page 193: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-21

6.8 Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)

6.8.1 OHAU power supply

OHAU power supply

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

Secondary voltage outside nominal voltage range.

� +12.0 V

� +3.3 V

� +5.2 V

� -12.0 V

Page 194: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-22

6.8.2 RFCOH Access Module

RFCOH access

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

DSC1...4 + WSC Operating channel

� DSC1...DSC4Service channels 1...4 are faulty.

� WSCThe wayside channel (2048 k) is faulty.

Page 195: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-23

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

� OOF WSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� Multiple write access DSCWrite mode disturbed.

� Multiple write access WSCWrite mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSC-AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 196: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-24

DSC1...4 + WSC Protection channel

� DSC1...DSC4Service channels 1...4 are faulty.

� WSCThe wayside channel (2048 k) is faulty.

Page 197: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-25

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

� OOF WSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS injected in input signal.

� WSCAIS injected in input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� Multiple write access DSCWrite mode disturbed.

� Multiple write access WSCWrite mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS injected in input signal.

� WSCAIS injected in input signal.

Page 198: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-26

DSC5...8 Operating channel

� DSC5...DSC8-Service channel 5...8 is faulty.

Page 199: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-27

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

AIS (in)

� DSC5...DSC8AIS injected in input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� Multiple write access DSCWrite mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC5...DSC8AIS injected in input signal.

Page 200: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-28

DSC5...8 Protection channel

� DSC5...DSC8Service channel 1...4 is faulty.

Page 201: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-29

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

AIS (in)

� DSC5...DSC8AIS injected in input signal.

� WSCAIS injected in input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� Multiple write access DSCWrite mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC5...DSC8AIS injected in input signal.

Page 202: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-30

6.8.3 EOW module

EOW #1

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

Transmission from

� WestTransmission from the West direction is disturbed.

� EastTransmission from the East direction is disturbed.

� NorthTransmission from the North direction is disturbed.

Page 203: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-31

6.8.4 QTN module

QTN

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

Interface A

� LOSLoss of input signal at interface A.

� AISAIS applied to interface A.

Interface B

� LOSLoss of input signal at interface B.

� AISAIS applied to interface B.

Page 204: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-32

6.8.5 ECC Gateway module

ECC Gateway

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

General

� No LAN connectionNo connection at the LAN interface.

West

� ECC communication lostECC transmission disturbed on the West side.

East

� ECC communication lostECC transmission disturbed on the East side.

Page 205: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-33

6.8.6 SOH Access Module

SOH access

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

West: Operating Channel 1

� DSC1...DSC4Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.

� WSCFailure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel.

� E1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1.

� F1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

Page 206: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-34

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

� OOF WSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 207: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-35

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 208: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-36

West: Protection Channel 1

� DSC1...DSC4Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.

� WSCFailure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel.

� E1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1.

� F1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

� OOF WSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

Page 209: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-37

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 210: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-38

East: Operating Channel 1

� DSC1...DSC4Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.

� WSCFailure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel.

� E1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1.

� F1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

� OOF WSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

Page 211: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-39

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 212: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-40

East: Protection Channel 1

� DSC1...DSC4Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.

� WSCFailure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel.

� E1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1.

� F1Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

Page 213: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-41

Receive direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

� LOSLoss of input signal.

� OOF DSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

� OOF WSCLoss of sync of the input signal.

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction

� No connection / DPU disconnectedWrite and read-only mode disturbed.

Page 214: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-42

AIS (in)

� DSC1...DSC4AIS is injected in the input signal.

� WSCAIS is injected in the input signal.

� E1AIS is injected in the input signal.

� F1AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 215: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-43

6.8.7 SOH Extension

SOH extension

Alarms

Alarm info

Module family

� E2The 64 kbit/s service channel E2 is faulty.

Page 216: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-44

Receive direction

� LOSLoss of input signal.

AIS (in)

� E2AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction

AIS (in)

� E2AIS is injected in the input signal.

Page 217: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-45

6.8.8 SISA-0/N

SISA0-N

Alarms

Alarm info

Standard

Internal

� Module defective General module alarm

� Hardware defective

� Inconsistent configuration Deviation between nominal and actual equipment with modules

Page 218: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-46

6.8.9 SISA-K/R

See separate manual.

Page 219: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-47

6.8.10 XQI

See separate XQI manual.

Page 220: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-48

6.9 Alignment / OP/PR channel failure

Via the Rack View menu, it is possible to open the Alignment window and request failures of operatingchannels OP 0...14 and protection channels PR 1...2. The operator can define whether he wants to getthe required information in graphical or tabular form. The alignment is required for hitless protectionswitching without bit errors.

Page 221: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Alarms

RF/160 OI 6-49

Display

Graphical

� INT-AGeneral alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module

� INT-BGeneral alarm "Module faulty" of the associated DPU module

� AlignTest switchover not error-free, since channel is not correctly aligned.

� RPS-AISAssociated DPU receives AIS in protection switching block.

Page 222: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Alarms Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI6-50

Display

Tabular

� INT-AGeneral alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module.

� RPS-AISThe associated DPU receives AIS in the protection switching block.

Page 223: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-1

7 Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Using the Service PC, it is possible to request measuring values and enter thresholds for these.Only in the active menu and on updating the information displayed by the logic module, an overshootingof the threshold values entered is spontanously signalled. At the corresponding module, such an alarm isnot displayed.

RestrictionsThe number of QMP data sets (records) on a SISA0-N module is limited so that not all performancecounters available can be monitored with the full storage depth. As soon as the maximally adjustablenumber is exceeded, the network element will send a negative acknowledgement.Independent of the degree of system expansion, a total number of 19324 bytes are available for QMPdata sets (records). A 15-min. data set requires a memory capacity of 18 bytes, a 24-h data set 29 bytes.

In case of a terminal with 14+2 configuration, the following performance measuring points are accessibleat functional group level:16 x RTF or RTFE: 1616 x RRTF: 161 x PSU: 14These 46 points can be activated with a storage depth of 4 x 15 minutes and 2 x 24 hours. In addition, thestorage depth of three points can be increased to 100 x 15 minutes, that of ten points can be increased to30 x 24 hours.The total memory capacity occupied is calculated as follows:

QMPs x Storage depth : QMP data sets Memory capacity46 x 4 (15 min.) : 184

- 3 x 4 (15 min.) : - 12+ 3 x 100 (15 min.) : + 300

472 x 18 bytes: 8496 bytes

46 x 2 (24h) : + 92- 10 x 2 (24h) : - 20+ 10 x 30 (24h) : + 300 372 x 29 Bytes: 10788 bytes

Memory capacity occupied: 19284 bytes

7.1 Overview of performance counters available

Module Test point No. Function Display in SOASPIE RS 1 Interruption (LOS) of the CMI input signal at the

electrical BB interface-

RPSI RS 1 Interruption (LOS) of the CMI input signal (from RPSC module) at the RPSI module

-

SPIO RS 1 Interruption (LOS) of the input signal at theoptical BB interface

-

RS radioside

3 RST parity check of the B1 bytes received onthe radio side without taking account ofprotection switching acc. to ITU-T G.826

Only N+0 /N+M:RRTF-1MP no. 1

DPU

MS radioside

4 MST parity check of the B2 bytes received onthe radio side without taking account ofprotection switching acc. to ITU-T G.826

-

Page 224: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-2

7.2 Transmitter

By activating the masks

Transmitter

Performance

Measuring values/thresholds

the following parameters can be set and requested:

1. Actual value of transmit level (accuracy: � 1 dB).

2. Nominal value of the transmit level

3. Control voltage for the RF amplifier

4. Temperature in the transmitter (min / max: –10°C / +85°)

RS line side 5 RST parity check of the B1 byte received on theline side acc. to ITU-T G.826

RTF-1 / RTFE-1MP no. 1

MS line side 6 MST parity check of the B2 bytes received onthe line side acc. to ITU-T G.826

-

RS RPS 7 RST parity check of the B1 bytes received onthe radio side taking protection switching (N+M,HSB) acc. to ITU-T G.826 into account

Only HSB:RRTF-1MP no. 1

PSE(OPx->BBx) 8 Number of automatic Rx-side protectionswitching processes (N+M and HSB)

Only N+M:PSUMP no. x(x=1...14)

Page 225: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-3

TX oscillator

Performance

Measuring values/thresholds

1. Oscillator control loop voltage

Page 226: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-4

7.3 Main receiver

Main receiver

Performance

Measuring values/thresholds

1. Linearized Rx level display

Accuracy: �2 dB in the range from -30 dBm to -70 dBm at room temperature

Page 227: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-5

RX oscillator

Performance

Measuring values/thresholds

1. Oscillator control loop voltage

Page 228: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-6

7.4 Diversity receiver

Div. Receiver

Performance

Measuring values/thresholds

1. Linearized Rx level display

Accuracy: �2 dB in the range from -30 dBm to -70 dBm at room temperature

Page 229: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-7

7.5 Modem Unit

7.5.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical

EL

Performance

Current 15-min. performance counters

EL

Performance

Current 24-h performance counters

Page 230: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-8

EL

Performance

15-min. performance values

EL

Performance

24-h performance values

Page 231: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-9

EL

Performance

Performance measuring points

Page 232: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-10

7.5.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical

OPT

Performance

Current 15-min. performance counters

OPT

Performance

Current 24-h performance counters

Page 233: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-11

OPT

Performance

15-min. performance values

OPT

Performance

24-h performance values

Page 234: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-12

OPT

Performance

Performance measuring points

OPT

Performance

Measuring values/ thresholds

1. Laser transmit levelThe value is displayed in percent related to the SOL (start of life) value.

2. Laser diode current

These threshold values are factory settings and cannot be changed.

Page 235: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-13

7.5.3 RPSI STM-1

RPSI STM-1

Performance

Current 15-min. performance counters

RPSI STM-1

Performance

Current 24-h performance counters

Page 236: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-14

RPSI STM-1

Performance

15-min. performance values

RPSI STM-1

Performance

24-h performance values

Page 237: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-15

RPSI STM-1

Performance

Performance measuring points

Page 238: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-16

7.5.4 Modem Unit power supply

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 239: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-17

7.5.5 ModulatorNo measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 240: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-18

7.5.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140...

Performance

Measuring values/thresholds

No thresholds adjustable for the eye pattern.

Page 241: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-19

7.5.7 Controller module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 242: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-20

7.5.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit

DPU/RPS STM-1

Performance

Current 15-min. performance counters

The performance data are based on the performance calculation in compliance with ITU-T G.826.

Page 243: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-21

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

RS line side

RST parity check of the line-side B1 byte.

Page 244: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-22

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 bytes after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -� BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB)

Page 245: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-23

DPU/RPS STM-1

Performance

Current 24-h performance counters

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

Page 246: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-24

RS line side

RST parity check of the line-side B1 byte.

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

Page 247: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-25

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -� BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB).

Page 248: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-26

DPU/RPS STM-1

Performance

15-min. performance values

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

Page 249: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-27

RS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B1 bytes

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

Page 250: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-28

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -� BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB).

Page 251: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-29

DPU/RPS STM-1

Performance

24-h performance values

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

Page 252: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-30

RS line side

RST parity check of the line-side B1 byte.

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

Page 253: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-31

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 bytes after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -� BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB).

Page 254: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-32

DPU/RPS STM-1

Performance

Performance measuring points

Page 255: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-33

7.6 RPSC + RPSH module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 256: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-34

7.7 OHAU Overhead Access Unit

7.7.1 OHAU power supply

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 257: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-35

7.7.2 RFCOH Access Module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 258: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-36

7.7.3 EOW module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 259: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-37

7.7.4 QTN module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 260: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-38

7.7.5 SOH Access Module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 261: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-39

7.7.6 SOH Extension module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 262: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-40

7.7.7 SISA-0/N module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 263: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RF/160 OI 7-41

7.7.8 SISA-K/R

No measuring values and thresholds available.

Page 264: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI7-42

7.7.9 XQI

ME1

Alarms

The selected alarm inputs can be enabled or disabled.Two priorities are possible:

1=Low2=High

Page 265: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Software, Equipment and Configuration Management

RF/160 OI 8-1

8 Software, Equipment and Configuration Management8.1 Required operator software

The following software is required for system operation:

� MSP Basic Software, Version � 2.16� MSP Application MDRS 155 E, Version � 1.21

� Management, configuration and monitoring of the microwave radio system at module level� MSP Application SISA-V, Version � 2.09

� SISA-0/N Software Update via MSP� MSP Application SISA-KR, Version � 1.02

� Installation and operation of QD2 bus networks� MSP Application XQI, Version � 2.06� � Configuration of user inputs (relay contacts)

8.2 Software download to system modules

Using the menu items

Hardware view

Modules

Administration

File transfer

all modules except SISA-0/N4 and SISA-KR can be loaded with new application software. For thispurpose, an appropriate control file (extension .CTL) must be available, which is used by the downloadroutine to determine the application to be downloaded to the individual modules.A document with detailed SW download instructions is supplied with each system software release.To avoid a bus overload, NE alarms should not be requested during the download process.

8.3 OSI parameter file transfer to the ECC Gateway Module

Using the menu items

Hardware view

Modules

Administration

File transfer

new OSI parameters can be downloaded to the ECC Gateway module. For this purpose, the OSI.CTLand OSI.XML files must be available in a directory.The download routine uses the OSI.CTL control file to extract the name of the OSI.XML parameter file.Depending on the size of this parameter file, the file transfer may take several seconds to some minutes.After a self-test of the ECC Gateway module, the OSI stack starts to operate with the new parameters.

4 The SISA0 application is required for this purpose.

Page 266: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Software, Equipment and Configuration Management Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI8-2

The parameter file can be edited, so that any OSI parameter values supported by the ECC Gatewaymodule can be downloaded.Caution: In order to be able to set up an ECC connection, the OSI parameters of the ECC Gatewaymodules involved must be identical. This prerequisite is not fulfilled before all ECC Gateway moduleshave received their new parameters. This means to download parameters to an ECC Gateway modulelocated in an NE addressable only via the ECC, the corresponding parameters must first be downloadedto this remote NE before they can be downloaded to the ECC Gateway module located in the local NE.

8.4 OSI parameter upload from the ECC Gateway moduleUsing the menu items

Hardware view

Modules

Administration

File transfer

the OSI parameters used by an ECC Gateway module can be uploaded. For this purpose, theOSIUPL.CTL file must be available.The upload routine uses the OSIUPL.CTL control file to extract the name of the OSI.UPL parameter file.Depending on the size of the parameter file, the upload process may take several seconds to someminutes. The OSI.UPL file is saved to the same directory as the OSI.CTL file.The upload file is composed of three parts. Part 1 (ACTUAL OSI-PARAMETERS) shows the OSIparameters actually used by the ECC Gateway module. Part 2 (INITIALIZATION FILE) shows thepermanently stored OSI parameters used for initialization after the first OSI parameter file transfer. Thesecan be extracted and transferred to further NEs. Part 3 (LOG FILE) shows fault reports that may occurwhen the stored parameter file is edited.

8.5 Saving and loading equipment configuration dataUsing the menu items

Hardware view

Modules

Equipment overview...Module group ...Module...

File

NE > File

each customer-specific configuration can be saved to a file memorized in the Service PC.This is possible both for the complete equipment (Terminal East or West), a module group (RFU OPx,Modem OPx, OHAUx, ...) or an individual module (e.g. Main Receiver, DPU, SOH Access etc.).

The configuration data of all modules below the hierarchy level from which the "NE > File“ function hasbeen activated are saved.

Page 267: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Software, Equipment and Configuration Management

RF/160 OI 8-3

The same applies to the downloading of memorized settings to modules using the

File > NE

function. Thus, a unit can be loaded with the complete configuration data so that a separate configurationof the individual modules is no longer necessary.

8.6 Creating a system data table

Using the menu items

Hardware view

Modules

Administration

System data

a table is called up which gives an overview of all modules available in the network element together withthe nameplate data and module software versions. This table can be saved as normal text file or as CSVfile and can be easily imported to other applications.

8.7 Adjusting the system timeThe system clock on the SISA0-N card is not battery-buffered, i.e. after a power outage both the date andtime are reset to default values (01.01.1900, 00:00).If the network element is connected to a SOA network, it is automatically synchronized once a day.

In the MDRS 155 E application, the date and time of the locally connected Service PC can be taken overby the SISA0 functional group:

FG SISA0

Administration

Status

Edit

Take over current time

Page 268: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Software, Equipment and Configuration Management Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI8-4

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 269: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-1

9 What is when? Troubleshooting

9.1 Module replacement

9.1.1 Safety instructions

For replacing modules, please note the following instructions:

On the fuse panel, switch off the power supply unit provided for the modules you want to replace. Donot forget that the DPU, Controller, RPSI, SPI-el. and SPI opt. modules of the Modem Unit aresupplied redundantly.Pull out or plug in the control and operating voltage cables on the Modem Unit, OHAU, transmitter andreceiver modules only with the power supply switched off (exception: RPS-C and RPS-H).Extract or insert the following modules only with the power supply switched off:

Modulator = MD (in Modem Unit)Demodulator = DM (in Modem Unit)SOH Access = SOHA (in OHAU)Power Supply = PS (in OHAU and Modem Unit)

Since it is necessary to replace modules in operation, the relevant processes are described in thischapter in such a way that only the corresponding modules can be replaced with the power supplyswitched on.

9.1.2 Module replacement - effects on the STM-1 signal

STM-1 signal in operating mode:

1+1 hot standby N+m w/o XPIC N+m with XPIC

Module

w/oerror

Biterror

Failure w/oerror

Biterror

Failure w/oerror

Biterror

Failure

Receiver RX X X XTransmitter TX X X XRPS-C X XRPS-H XSPI electr. X X XSPI optical X X XRPSI X XMUPS X X X XMD/DM X X X XController X X XDPU X X X

Service channelsModulew/oerror

NoSOA

Failure w/oerror

NoSOA

Failure w/oerror

NoSOA

Failure

OHAU PS X X X X X XRFCOH X X XEOW X XQTN X X XSISA-K/R X X XECC Gateway X X XSOH/SOH ext. X X X X X XSISA-0/N X X X

Page 270: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-2

9.2 Replacing modules

9.2.1 Transmitter TXWhen replacing the transmitter, please observe the sequence describedbelow in order to avoid operational interferences in other channels.

1. Save the current configuration.Note: If this is not possible, you must perform the configuration usingthe backup copy available in the station or configure the transmittermanually (see step 6).

2. In case of redundant systems, disable both the channel to beexchanged and the automatic switchover function.

The corresponding channel and protecting switchingfunction must be disabled in both the local station andfar end.

3. Switch off the circuit breaker of the corresponding channel.

With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to5 s in the XPIC partner channel.In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will beinterrupted.

4. Replace the transmitter.- Set up again all connections except the IF cable connection.- When doing this, ensure that the connectors are correctly positioned.

5. Switch on the channel again.

In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

6. Download the configuration using the appropriate backup file. If thisfile is not available, configure the unit manually.– Deactivate the ATPC function.– Set the output power to its minimum value.

7. Connect the IF cable.This may temporarily lead to bit errors in the direct adjacent channels.

8. Activate the ATPC function.

9. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data andsoftware version correspond with the current status.

10. Enable again the protection switching function.

11. Switch over to the automatic mode.

MU

CONT

X4

SYN

X2X1

BAT

IFX2

OPT

X5

BATX3

RF

X1

MU

CONT

X4

SYN

X2X1

BAT

IFX2

OPT

X5

BATX3

RF

X1

Page 271: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-3

9.2.2 Receiver RX

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use theconfiguration data stored in the station.

2. In case of redundant systems, disable both the channel to beexchanged and protection switchover.

The corresponding channel and protecting switchingfunction must be disabled in both the local station andfar end.

3. Switch off the defective channel by means of the fuse.

With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to5 s in the XPIC partner channel.In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will beinterrupted.

4. Replace the corresponding unit. In doing this, ensure that theconnectors are correctly positioned.

5. Switch on the channel again.

In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

6. Download the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is notavailable, configure the unit as required.

7. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data andsoftware version correspond with the current status.

8. Enable again the protection switching function.

9. Switch over to the automatic mode.X1 SYN X2

BAT

X1

RECX5

IF

X2

MUCONTR

BAT

X4

X3

X22

RFX21

IF COMB

X24

IF COMB

X23

IF COMB

X25

IF

RF

Page 272: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-4

9.2.3 RPS-C

1. Block all OP channels against switchover.

2. On the new RPS-C unit, adjust the correct address.

3. Remove the RPS-C unit currently still mounted.

4. Change the connecting cables 1:1.

5. Mount the new RPS-C unit.

6. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software versioncorrespond with the current status.

9.2.4 RPS-H

1. Switch off the ATPC function.

2. Block the DPU against switchover (RX and TX).

3. Remove the RPS-H unit still mounted.

4. Pull out the X13 plug connector (TX switch).

5. Change the cables 1:1.

6. Plug in again connector X13 (TX switch).

7. Mount the new RPS-H unit.

8. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software versioncorrespond with the current status.

9. Activate the ATPC function.

10. Switch over to the automatic mode.

Page 273: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-5

9.2.5 Modem Unit

9.2.5.1 SPI STM-1 electrical

1. Remove the BB cable.

The STM-1 signal will also be interrupted with PR operation.

2. Replace the SPI-STM-1 module.

3. Plug in again the BB cable.

4. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

LON E

LON W

X82

X74

X73

IF1

IF1 X81

X79X91X89 BFI-ESG

X55

X53

PR1/2

PR1/1

X71 X51BAT1 19...75V DC

ROH 1B

SOH 1B

SOH 1A

ROH A X78 RC

X83 CAN W

X84 CAN E

X63 X85 TX1

X87 RX1

X86 TX2

X88 RX2

X61 ROH 2B

X59 SOH 2B

X77 MST-ADR

X75

X76

IF2

IF2

X96

X72 BAT2 19...75V DCPR2/2

X100X95X99

PR2/1

X57 SOH 2AX70 DCCR

X92X90

BATTX RX

OPPR1PR2

TX RX

OPPR1PR2

BAT

SYN SWITCHTX LOCK

MAN

STM-1

STM-1

1

2

MAN

SYNTX

SWITCHLOCK

RPSI PS MD DPURPS CTRL DM DM DPU

RPS MD PS RPSI

SPISPI

+- -

+

Page 274: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-6

9.2.5.2 SPI STM-1 optical

1. Remove the BB cable.

The STM-1 signal will also be interrupted with PR operation.

2. Replace the SPI-STM-1 module.

3. Plug in again the BB cable.

4. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

9.2.5.3 RPSI STM-1

1. Block the OP channel against switchover.

2. Replace the RPSI-STM-1 module.

3. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

4. Enable again the protection switching function.

5. Switch over to the automatic mode.

9.2.5.4 Modem Unit Power Supply

1. In case of redundant systems, disable the channel to be exchanged.

2. Disable the protection switching function.

The corresponding channel and protecting switching function must bedisabled in both the local station and far end.

3. Switch off the defective channel by means of the circuit breaker.

With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to5 s in the XPIC partner channel.In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will be interrupted.

4. Exchange the Modem Unit power supply.

5. Switch on again the channel.

In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

6. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

7. Enable again the protection switching function.

8. Switch over to the automatic mode.

Page 275: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-7

9.2.5.5 Modulator / Demodulator

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. In case of redundant systems, disable both the channel to be exchanged and protectionswitchover.

The corresponding channel and protecting switching function must be disabledin both the local station and far end.

3. Switch off the defective channel by means of the circuit breaker.

With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partnerchannel.In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will be interrupted.

4. Replace the modulator/demodulator. In doing this, ensure that the connectors are correctlypositioned.

5. Switch the channel on again.

In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPICpartner channel.

6. Download the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the unitas required.

7. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

8. Enable again the protection switching function.

9. Switch over to the automatic mode.

9.2.5.6 Controller

1. Replace the Controller module.

2. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

Page 276: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-8

9.2.5.7 DPU/RPS STM-1

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the DPU/RPS STM-1.

The STM-1 signal will also be interrupted with PR operation. In case of XPICsystems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

3. Mount the DPU/RPS STM-1.

In case of XPIC systems, bit errors may occur for up to 5 s in the XPICpartner channel.

4. Download the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the unitas required.

5. Align the system as described in Chapter 5 of the Operating Instructions.

6. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

Page 277: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-9

9.2.6 OHAU

9.2.6.1 OHAU Power Supply

1. Switch off the OHAU by means of the circuit breaker.

All service channels will be interrupted. The system cannot be monitored anymore by SOA.

2. Exchange the OHAU Power Supply.

3. Switch on again the OHAU.

RW1 OUT X67 ROH1 W

X34 EOW1 X37 EOW2 N X36 EOW2 A

X42 Q CON X71BAT1 19...75V DC

SE1 IN X43 Q LOC

X47 QSC EXT X33 EOW1 A

X74 ROH/WSC W X73 ROH/WSC E

X32EOW1 EXT S

RE1 OUT X60 DSC 1...8 W

X40 EOW1 INT S X51 SOH/E1 E X53 SOH/F1 E

X117 RC SISA X31 EOW2 EXT X30 EOW1 EXT

X81 LON W X38 Q E

RW2 IN X68 ROH2 W

X82 LON E X39 Q W

BAT

PS EOW1

CALL

EOW2

CALL

RESET

SERV

SISA0/N

SOHEXT

SOHACC

RFCOHE

RFCOHW

X65 ROH1 E

X61 SOH1 E SE2 OUT

X75 SOH/WSC E X45 SOH/E2 E

X55 DSC 9...12 E X41 EOW2 INT S

X46 SOH/E2 W X35 EOW2 EXT S

X62 SOH2 E

X59 DSC 1...8 E

X63 SOH1 W SW2 IN

X56 DSC 9...12 W X54 SOH/F1 W

X76 SOH/WSC W X52 SOH/E W

X64 SOH2 W

X66 ROH2 E SW1 OUT

- +

X108

X107

X115X114

X113

X109

X106X110

X105X101

X102X111

X112

X103X104

X107

ECC

Page 278: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-10

9.2.6.2 RFCOH EAST / WEST

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the RFCOH module.

The RFCOH service channels are interrupted.

3. On the new RFCOH module, configure the 2 Mbit/s interfaces.

4. Mount the RFCOH module.

5. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe RFCOH module as required.

6. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

9.2.6.3 EOW

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the EOW module.

EOW service channels are interrupted.

3. Mount the EOW module.

4. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe EOW module as required.

5. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

9.2.6.4 QTN

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the QTN module.

QTN service channels are interrupted (no more SOA monitoring).

3. Mount the QTN module.

4. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe QTN module as required.

5. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

Page 279: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-11

9.2.6.5 SISA-K/R

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the SISA-K/R module.

SOA monitoring is no longer possible.

3. Configure the SISA bus terminations.

4. Mount the SISA-K/R module.

5. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe SISA-K/R module as required.

9.2.6.6 ECC Gateway

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the ECC Gateway module.

SOA monitoring is no longer possible.

3. Mount the ECC Gateway module.

4. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe ECC Gateway module as required.

5. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

9.2.6.7 SOH Access / SOH Extension

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Switch off the SOH Access / SOH Extension module by means of the circuit breaker.

All service channels will be interrupted.

3. Remove the SOH Access / SOH Extension module.

4. On the new SOH Access module, configure the 2 Mbit/s interfaces.

5. Mount the SOH Access / SOH Extension module.

6. Switch on again the SOH Access / SOH Extension module by means of the circuit breaker.

7. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe SOH Access / SOH Extension module as required.

8. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

Page 280: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-12

9.2.6.8 SISA-0/N

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in thestation.

2. Remove the SISA-0/N module.

SOA monitoring is no longer possible.

3. On the new SISA-0/N module, adjust again the old SISA network address.

4. Mount the SISA-0/N module.

5. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configurethe SISA-0/N module as required.

6. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspondwith the current status.

Page 281: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-13

9.3 RF Unit

Alarms

Loss

of I

F in

put s

igna

l at T

x X2

Loss

of I

F in

put s

igna

l at R

x X2

3/24

Loss

of R

F in

put s

igna

l at R

x X2

Loss

of R

F in

put s

igna

l at R

x X2

2Fr

eque

ncy � fi

lter f

requ

ency

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

hop

Loss

of i

nput

syn

c si

gnal

at O

sc X

1M

anua

l adj

ustm

ent

RF

osci

llato

r fai

lure

Con

figur

atio

n se

tting

Swee

p m

ode

activ

eXP

IC S

lave

mod

e ac

tive

Man

ual T

x po

wer

con

trol a

ctiv

eLe

ngth

com

pens

atio

n m

ode

activ

eFF

retu

rn d

irect

ion

faul

tyM

issi

ng c

onne

ctin

g ca

ble

Pow

er s

uppl

y fa

ilure

Ope

ratin

g vo

ltage

failu

reIn

tern

al fa

ult

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

Transmitter TxIF power too low X X X X X XIF input signal X XATPC level error X XManual operation X XBAT X XFault X X X X X X X X X

Tx/Rx oscillator moduleLocal oscillator X XCross-channel osc. X X X XFault X X X X X X

Main receiverLOS X X X XManual operation X X X X

BAT X XFault X X X X X X X X X X

Diversity receiverLOS diversity X X X XLOS at combiner input X X XManual operation X X X XFault X X X X X X X X X X X

Page 282: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-14

9.4 Modem Unit

Alarms

Loss

of I

F in

put s

igna

lLo

ss o

f IF

outp

ut s

igna

lN

o/w

rong

sig

nal f

rom

DPU

No/

wro

ng B

B C

MI i

nput

sig

nal

No/

wro

ng o

ptic

al B

B in

put s

igna

lLa

ser i

n te

st m

ode

No

sign

al fr

om D

PUW

rong

con

figur

atio

n in

HSB

mod

eC

onfig

urat

ion

setti

ngM

aste

r not

in X

PIC

mod

eXP

IC m

ode

activ

eXP

IC m

ode

not a

ctiv

eIn

terru

ptio

n of

radi

o ho

pFF

retu

rn d

irect

ion

faul

tyXP

IC m

ode

lead

s to

BE

Cro

ss-p

olar

ch.

not

in s

ync

No

XPIC

syn

chro

niza

tion

sign

alO

pera

ting

volta

ge fa

ilure

Pow

er s

uppl

y fa

ilure

Inte

rnal

erro

rM

odul

e de

fect

ive

or fa

ulty

SPI STM-1 EL moduleLOS at input X XOutput signal failure X XReference clock X XCode error at input XFault X X X

SPI STM-1 OPT moduleTx laser power <70% X X XLOS at input XFault X X X X

RPSI STM-1 moduleLOS at input X XOutput signal failure X XReference clock X XCode error at input XFault X X X

Modem Unit power supplyx.x V X XBAT X XFault X X X X

ModulatorNo IF output signal X XClock signal out of sync

X X

IF carrier out of sync X XNo IF carrier sync X X X XGeneral alarm of ASIC X X X XFault X X X X X X X X X X

Page 283: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-15

Alarms

Loss

of I

F in

put s

igna

lLo

ss o

f IF

outp

ut s

igna

lN

o/w

rong

sig

nal f

rom

DPU

Bit e

rror r

atio

> 1

E-02

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

hop

Wro

ng c

lock

in in

put s

igna

lBa

d in

put s

igna

l qua

lity

Loss

of i

nput

syn

c si

gnal

Con

figur

atio

n se

tting

Mas

ter n

ot in

XPI

C m

ode

XPIC

mod

e ac

tive

XPIC

mod

e no

t act

ive

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

hop

FF re

turn

dire

ctio

n fa

ulty

XPIC

mod

e le

ads

to B

EC

ross

-pol

ar c

h. n

ot in

syn

cN

o XP

IC s

ynch

roni

zatio

n si

gnal

Ope

ratin

g vo

ltage

failu

rePo

wer

sup

ply

failu

reIn

tern

al e

rror

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

Demodulator 64QAMCarrier recovery X X XA/D converter output X XRadio clock monitoring X XNo IF input signal X XNo FEC synchronization

X X X

Line clock monitoring XXPIC operation not possible

X X X X X

Elastic buffer overflow XFault X X X X X X X X X X X

Demodulator 128QAMCarrier recovery X X XA/D converter output X XRadio clock monitoring X X

No IF signal from other Demod

X X

Other Demod not synchronized

X X X X

Reset of equalizer X X X X X MLC Decoder not synchronized

X X X

FIFO pointer collision in MLC decoder

X

XPIC operation not possible

X X X X X

Elastic buffer overflow of XPE

X X X

Fault X X X X X X X X X X X

Page 284: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-16

Alarms

Loop

back

act

ivat

edB1

byt

e in

vers

ion

activ

ated

AIS

in B

B in

put s

igna

lN

o/w

rong

BB

inpu

t sig

nal

Faul

ty B

B in

terfa

ceN

o/w

rong

sig

nal f

rom

Dem

odAI

S in

Rx

sign

alAI

S in

ject

. dis

able

d at

SES

(B1)

Wro

ng p

ath

trace

rece

ived

Wro

ng c

hann

el ID

rece

ived

Wro

ng p

olar

izat

ion

ID re

ceiv

edC

AN ri

ng in

terru

pted

XPIC

mod

e ac

tive

XPIC

mod

e no

t act

ive

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

hop

Wro

ng R

PS B

B-br

anch

ing

Oth

er D

PU(s

) def

ectiv

e or

faul

tyAl

l PR

s al

read

y us

ed o

r loc

ked

Use

r thr

esho

ld is

exc

eede

dO

pera

ting

volta

ge fa

ilure

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

DPUSTM-1 transmission

Manual intervention X X XLine side

LOS X XLOF STM-1 X XAIS received XSES (B1) X XJ0-TIM X

Radio sideAIS received XSES (B1)J0-TIM XRadio hop identifier XLA Tx received

Operating channelLOS X XLOF RFCOH X XLOF STM-1 X X

Protection channelLOS X XLOF RFCOH X XLOF STM-1 X X

Protection switchingFaulty CAN ring X

Tx sideLOS (PR from OP) X XLOF (PR from OP) X XNumber of prot.switchovers exceededthreshold

X

Rx sideLOS (OP from PR) X XLOF (OP from PR) X XAlignment OP-PRNumber of prot.switchovers exceededthreshold

X

Protection switchingcould not beperformed

X

Page 285: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-17

Alarms

AIS

in B

B in

put s

igna

lN

o/w

rong

BB

inpu

t sig

nal

Faul

ty B

B in

terfa

ceN

o/w

rong

sig

nal f

rom

Dem

odAI

S in

Rx

sign

alW

rong

pat

h tra

ce re

ceiv

edW

rong

cha

nnel

ID re

ceiv

edW

rong

pol

ariz

atio

n ID

rece

ived

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

hop

Tran

smitt

er d

ispl

ayM

anua

l sw

itcho

ver (

only

RPS

)C

hann

el is

lock

ed (o

nly

RPS

)C

AN ri

ng in

terru

pted

(onl

y R

PS)

RPS

on

chan

nel i

s sy

ncho

nize

dR

PS is

act

ive

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

DPU

Tx X X XRx X X X X XOP XOPPR1 XPR1 XPR2 XPR2 XSYN XTx XSWITCH XLOCK XLOCK blinks XFault X

Page 286: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-18

9.5 RPS

Alarms

CAN

mes

sage

s co

rrupt

edC

AN lo

op is

not

clo

sed

Shor

t circ

uit -

sec

. vol

tage

DSC

not

sw

itche

d th

roug

hO

pera

ting

volta

ge fa

ilure

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

RPS-C moduleConfigurationPower supply XCAN bus XFault X X X

RPS-H module Power supply X CAN communication X

Fault X X X

9.6 OHA Unit

9.6.1 OHAU power supply

Alarms

Shor

t circ

uit -

sec

. vol

tage

Ope

ratin

g vo

ltage

failu

reM

odul

e de

fect

ive

or fa

ulty

OHAU power supplyx.x. VBAT X X XFault X X X

Page 287: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-19

9.6.2 RFCOH Access Module

Alarms

Loss

of R

FCO

H in

put s

igna

lN

o co

nnec

tion

to D

PUIn

terru

ptio

n of

radi

o lin

kAI

S in

dig

ital i

nput

sig

nal

Mis

sing

Tx-

side

inpu

t sig

nal

Wro

ng c

onfig

ruat

ion

setti

ng

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

RFCOH Access ModuleDSC1..4 + WSC OP

DSC1...DSC4 X X X X X X XWSC X X X X X X XRX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XOOF WSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X XAIS (in) WSC X X

TX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

Multiple write access WSC

X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 XAIS (in) WSC X

DSC1..4 + WSC PRDSC1...DSC4 X X X X X X XWSC X X X X X X XRX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XOOF WSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X XAIS (in) WSC X X

TX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

Multiple write access WSC

X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 XAIS (in) WSC X

Page 288: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-20

Alarms

Loss

of R

FCO

H in

put s

igna

lN

o co

nnec

tion

to D

PUIn

terru

ptio

n of

radi

o lin

kAI

S in

dig

ital i

nput

sig

nal

Mis

sing

Tx-

side

inpu

t sig

nal

Wro

ng c

onfig

ruat

ion

setti

ng

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

RFCOH Access ModuleDSC 5..8 OP

DSC5...DSC8 X X X X X X XRX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 X X

TX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X X X

AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 XDSC 5..8 PR

DSC5...DSC8 X X X X X X XRX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 X X

TX directionNo connection / DPU disc.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 XFault X X X X X X X

Page 289: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-21

9.6.3 SOH Access Module

Alarms

Loss

of S

OH

inpu

t sig

nal

No

conn

ectio

n to

DPU

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

link

AIS

in d

igita

l inp

ut s

igna

lM

issi

ng T

x-si

de in

put s

igna

lW

rong

con

figru

atio

n se

tting

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SOH Access ModuleWest: Operating channel OP

DSC1...DSC4 X X X X X X XWSC X X X X X X XE1 X X X X X X XF1 X X X X X X X

Rx directionNo connection / DPU disco.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X X XOOF WSC X X X X XAIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X XAIS (in) WSC X XAIS (in) E1 X XAIS (in) F1 X X

Tx directionNo connection / DPU disco.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

Multiple write access WSC

X

Multiple write access E1

X

Multiple write access F1

X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 XAIS (in) WSC XAIS (in) E1 XAIS (in) F1 X

Page 290: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-22

Alarms

Loss

of S

OH

inpu

t sig

nal

No

conn

ectio

n to

DPU

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

link

AIS

in d

igita

l inp

ut s

igna

lM

issi

ng T

x-si

de in

put s

igna

lW

rong

con

figur

atio

n se

tting

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SOH Access ModuleWest: Protection channel PR

DSC1...DSC4 X X X X X X XWSC X X X X X X XE1 X X X X X X XF1 X X X X X X XRx direction

No connection / DPU disco.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XOOF WSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X XAIS (in) WSC X XAIS (in) E1 X XAIS (in) F1 X X

Tx directionNo connection / DPU disco.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

Multiple write access WSC

X

Multiple write access E1

X

Multiple write access F1

X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 XAIS (in) WSC XAIS (in) E1 XAIS (in) F1 X

Page 291: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-23

Alarms

Loss

of S

OH

inpu

t sig

nal

No

conn

ectio

n to

DPU

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

link

AIS

in d

igita

l inp

ut s

igna

lM

issi

ng T

x-si

de in

put s

igna

lW

rong

con

figur

atio

n se

tting

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SOH Access ModuleEast: Operating channel OP

DSC1...DSC4 X X X X X X XWSC X X X X X X XE1 X X X X X X XF1 X X X X X X X

Rx directionNo connection / DPU disconnection

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XOOF WSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X XAIS (in) WSC X XAIS (in) E1 X XAIS (in) F1 X X

Tx directionNo connection / DPU disconnection

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

Multiple write access WSC

X

Multiple write access E1

X

Multiple write access F1

X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 XAIS (in) WSC XAIS (in) E1 XAIS (in) F1 X

Page 292: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-24

Alarms

Loss

of S

OH

inpu

t sig

nal

No

conn

ectio

n to

DPU

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

link

AIS

in d

igita

l inp

ut s

igna

lM

issi

ng T

x-si

de in

put s

igna

lW

rong

con

figur

atio

n se

tting

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SOH Access ModuleEast: Protection channel PR

DSC1...DSC4 X X X X X X XWSC X X X X X X XE1 X X X X X X XF1 X X X X X X X

Rx directionNo connection / DPU disconnect.

X X X

LOS X X XOOF DSC X X X XOOF WSC X X X XAIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X XAIS (in) WSC X XAIS (in) E1 X XAIS (in) F1 X X

Tx directionNo connection / DPU disco.

X X X

Multiple write access DSC

X

Multiple write access WSC

X

Multiple write access E1

X

Multiple write access F1

X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 XAIS (in) WSC XAIS (in) E1 XAIS (in) F1 X

Fault X X X X X X X

Page 293: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-25

9.6.4 SOH Extension Module

Alarms

Loss

of S

OH

inpu

t sig

nal

No

conn

ectio

n to

DPU

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

link

AIS

in d

igita

l inp

ut s

igna

lM

issi

ng T

x-si

de in

put s

igna

lW

rong

con

figru

atio

n se

tting

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SOH Extension ModuleWest: Operating channel OP

DCCM X X XDCCR X X XE2 X X X X X

Rx directionLOS X X XAIS (in) E2 X X

Tx directionAIS (in) E2 XAIS (in) D1 XMultiple write access E2

X

West: Protection channel PRDCCM X X XDCCR X X XE2 X X X X X

Rx directionLOS X X XAIS (in) E2 X X

Tx directionAIS (in) E2 X

Multiple write access E2

X

Page 294: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-26

Alarms

Loss

of S

OH

inpu

t sig

nal

No

conn

ectio

n to

DPU

Inte

rrupt

ion

of ra

dio

link

AIS

in d

igita

l inp

ut s

igna

lM

issi

ng T

x-si

de in

put s

igna

lW

rong

con

figru

atio

n se

tting

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SOH Extension ModuleEast: Operating channel OP

DCCM X X XDCCR X X XE2 X X X X X

Rx directionLOS X X XAIS (in) E2 X X

Tx directionAIS (in) E2 X

Multiple write access E2

X

Multiple write accessD1

X

East: Protection channel PRDCCM X X XDCCR X X XE2 X X X X X

Rx directionLOS X X XAIS (in) E2 X X

Tx directionAIS (in) E2 X

Multiple write access E2

X

Fault X X X X X X X

Page 295: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions What is when? Troubleshooting

RF/160 OI 9-27

9.6.5 SISA0/N

Alarms

LMT

conn

ecte

d to

por

t FN

omin

al/A

ctua

l equ

ipm

ent

Inte

rnal

erro

rO

pera

ting

volta

ge fa

ilure

Mod

ule

defe

ctiv

e or

faul

ty

SISA-0/N moduleModule defective XHardware defective XInconsistent configuration

X

Faulty software XNo free memory capacity

X

Program memory notreadable

X

Data memory notreadable

X

Service XFault X X

Page 296: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

What is when? Troubleshooting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI9-28

9.6.6 EOW and QTN

Alarms

Loss

of s

igna

l fro

m “W

est”

AIS

rece

ived

from

“Wes

t”Lo

ss o

f sig

nal f

rom

“Eas

t”AI

S re

ceiv

ed fr

om “E

ast”

Loss

of s

igna

l fro

m “N

orth

”R

ecei

ved

AIS

from

“Nor

th”

Phon

e ca

ll in

dica

tion

Loss

of s

igna

l at i

nter

f. “A

”AI

S re

ceiv

ed a

t int

erf.

“A”

Loss

of s

igna

l at i

nter

f. “´B

”AI

S re

ceiv

ed a

t int

erf.

“B”

SISA

/K a

larm

SISA

/K s

ervi

ce in

dica

tion

EOW moduleWest X XEast X XNorth X XCALL XFault X X X X X X

QTN moduleInterface A

LOS XAIS X

Interface BLOS XAIS X

SISA K XSISA K XINT X XEXT DSC X XID X X X X

Page 297: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Subracks and Modules

RF/160 OI 10-1

10 Subracks and Modules10.1 Transmitter (Tx)

Fig. 10-1: Transmitter (Tx)

MU

CONT

X4

SYN

X2X1

BAT

IFX2

OPT

X5

BATX3

RF

X1

Page 298: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Subracks and Modules Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI10-2

10.2 Main and diversity receiver (Rx / RxD)

Fig. 10-2: Main and diversity receiver (Rx/RxD)

X1 SYN X2

BAT

X1

RECX5

IF

X2

MUCONTR

BAT

X4

X3

X22

RFX21

IF COMB

X24

IF COMB

X23

IF COMB

X25

IF

RF

Page 299: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Subracks and Modules

RF/160 OI 10-3

10.3 RPS-C

Fig. 10-3: RPS-C

TRAN

SIT

END

TX S

IDE

RX

SID

E

LON

E

X1X2

LON

W

X6CA

N E

X5CA

N W

X4CA

N E

X3CA

N W

X27

OP7

/14

X26

OP6

/13

X25

OP5

/12X2

4

OP4

/11X2

3

OP3

/10

X22

OP2

/9

X21

OP1

X28

OP8

X29

X20

PR1/

2

X18

OP8

X17

OP7

/14

X16

OP6

/13

X15

OP5

/12X1

4

OP4

/11

X10

PR1/

2

X19

X11

OP1

X12

OP2

/9

X13

OP3

/10

S1

Page 300: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Subracks and Modules Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI10-4

10.4 RPS-H

Fig. 10-4: RPS-H

X13

X12

X11

TX2

(MU

CONT

R)X8

62

X852

X872

RX2

(MU

CONT

R)X8

82

MO

DEM

UNI

T (T

X1)

X851

X861

X871

MO

DEM

UNI

T (T

X2)

MO

DEM

UNI

T (R

X1)

TX

SWIT

CH

RX

SWIT

CH

RX D

IVSW

ITCH

X881

MO

DEM

UNI

T (R

X2)

X84

MO

DEM

UNI

T

CAN

E

Page 301: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Subracks and Modules

RF/160 OI 10-5

10.5 Modem Unit

Fig. 10-5: MU subrack

LON

E

LON

W

X82

X74

X73

IF1

IF1

X81

X79

X91 X89

BFI

-ESG

X55

X53

PR

1/2

PR1/

1

X71

X51

BAT

1 19

...75

V D

C

RO

H 1

B

SO

H 1

B

SO

H 1

A

RO

H A

X78

RC

X83

CAN

W

X84

CAN

E

X63

X85

TX1

X87

RX1

X86

TX2

X88

RX2

X61

RO

H 2

B

X59

SO

H 2

B

X77

MS

T-AD

R

X75

X76

IF2

IF2 X96

X72

BAT2

19.

..75V

DC

PR2

/2

X10

0X9

5X

99

PR2

/1

X57

SO

H 2

AX

70D

CC

R

X92

X90

BAT

TXR

X

OP

PR1

PR2

TXR

X

OP

PR1

PR2

BAT

SYN

SW

ITCH

TXLO

CK

MA

N

STM

-1

STM

-1

1 2

MA

N

SYN TX

SW

ITC

HLO

CK

RPS

IPS

MD

DPU

RPS

CTR

LD

MD

MD

PUR

PSM

DPS

RPS

I

SPI

SPI

+-

-+

6U2U

X1X3X2

Page 302: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Subracks and Modules Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI10-6

10.6 OHAU subrack

10.6.1 OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module)

Fig. 10-6: OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module)

RW

1 O

UT

X67

RO

H1

W

X34

EO

W1

X37

EOW

2 N

X36

EO

W2

A

X42

Q C

ON

X71 BAT

1 19

...75

V D

C

SE

1 IN

X43

Q L

OC

X47

QSC

EX

TX

33E

OW

1 A

X74

RO

H/W

SC

WX

73R

OH

/WSC

E

X32

EOW

1 EX

T S

RE

1 O

UT

X60

DS

C 1

...8

W

X40

EO

W1

INT

SX5

1S

OH

/E1

EX

53S

OH

/F1

E

X11

7R

C S

ISA

X31

EO

W2

EXT

X30

EO

W1

EXT

X81

LON

WX3

8Q

E

RW

2 IN

X68

RO

H2

W

X82

LON

EX3

9Q

W

BAT

PSEO

W1

CA

LL

Q

INTID

EXT

DS

C

SIS

AK

RE

SET

EOW

2

CAL

L

RES

ET

SER

V

SISA

0/N

SOH

EXT

SOH

ACC

RFC

OH

ER

FCO

HW

X65

RO

H1

E

X61

SO

H1

ES

E2

OU

T

X75

SO

H/W

SC

EX

45SO

H/E

2 E

X55

DS

C 9

...12

EX4

1E

OW

2 IN

T S

X46

SO

H/E

2 W

X35

EO

W2

EXT

S

X62

SO

H2

E

X59

DS

C 1

...8

E

X63

SO

H1

WS

W2

IN

X56

DS

C 9

...12

WX5

4S

OH

/F1

W

X76

SOH

/WS

C W

X52

SO

H/E

W

X64

SO

H2

W

X66

RO

H2

ESW

1 O

UT

-+

6U

X108

X107

X11

5X

114

X11

3

X10

9

X10

6X

110

X105

X101

X102

X111

X112

X103

X104

X107

Page 303: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Subracks and Modules

RF/160 OI 10-7

10.6.2 OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)

Fig. 10-7: OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)

RW

1 O

UT

X67

RO

H1

W

X34

EO

W1

X37

EO

W2

NX

36E

OW

2 A

X42

Q C

ON

X71 B

AT1

19...

75V

DC

SE1

INX

43Q

LO

C

X47

QS

C E

XT

X33

EOW

1 A

X74

RO

H/W

SC W

X73

RO

H/W

SC E

X32

EO

W1

EXT

S

RE

1 O

UT

X60

DSC

1...

8 W

X40

EO

W1

INT

SX

51SO

H/E

1 E

X53

SO

H/F

1 E

X117

RC

SIS

AX

31EO

W2

EXT

X30

EO

W1

EXT

X81

LON

WX

38Q

E

RW

2 IN

X68

RO

H2

W

X82

LON

EX

39Q

W

BA

T

PSEO

W1

CA

LL

EOW

2

CAL

L

RE

SET

SE

RV

SISA 0/N

SOH

EXT

SOH

ACC

RFC

OH

ER

FCO

HW

X65

RO

H1

E

X61

SO

H1

ES

E2

OU

T

X75

SO

H/W

SC

EX

45SO

H/E

2 E

X55

DS

C 9

...12

EX

41E

OW

2 IN

T S

X46

SO

H/E

2 W

X35

EO

W2

EXT

S

X62

SO

H2

E

X59

DS

C 1

...8

E

X63

SO

H1

WS

W2

IN

X56

DS

C 9

...12

WX

54S

OH

/F1

W

X76

SO

H/W

SC

WX

52S

OH

/E W

X64

SO

H2

W

X66

RO

H2

ES

W1

OU

T

-+

6U

X10

8

X10

7

X11

5X

114

X11

3

X109

X10

6X

110

X10

5X

101

X10

2X

111

X11

2

X10

3X

104

X10

7

ECC

Page 304: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Subracks and Modules Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI10-8

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 305: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-1

11 Channel Patterns

11.1 Channel patterns of the 4 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-1: ITU-R F.382

213

MH

z

68 M

Hz

4003

.5 M

Hz

3803

.5 M

Hz

4203

.5 M

Hz

29 M

Hz

3824

.5 M

Hz

3853

.5 M

Hz

3882

.5 M

Hz

3911

.5 M

Hz

3940

.5 M

Hz

3969

.5 M

Hz

4037

.5 M

Hz

4066

.5 M

Hz

4095

.5 M

Hz

4124

.5 M

Hz

4153

.5 M

Hz

4182

.5 M

Hz

Page 306: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-2

Fig. 11-2: ITU-R F.382 China

213

MH

z

68 M

Hz

3592

.0 M

Hz

3392

MHz

3792

MHz

29 M

Hz

3413

.0 M

Hz

3442

.0 M

Hz

3471

.0 M

Hz

3500

.0 M

Hz

3529

.0 M

Hz

3558

.0 M

Hz

3626

.0 M

Hz

3655

.0 M

Hz

3684

.0 M

Hz

3713

.0 M

Hz

3742

.0 M

Hz

3771

.0 M

Hz

213

MH

z

68 M

Hz

4003

.5 M

Hz

3803

.5 M

Hz

4203

.5 M

Hz

29 M

Hz

3824

.5 M

Hz

3853

.5 M

Hz

3882

.5 M

Hz

3911

.5 M

Hz

3940

.5 M

Hz

3969

.5 M

Hz

4037

.5 M

Hz

4066

.5 M

Hz

4095

.5 M

Hz

4124

.5 M

Hz

4153

.5 M

Hz

4182

.5 M

Hz

Page 307: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-3

Fig. 11-3: ITU-R F.382 (OIRT)

3640

.5 M

Hz

3669

.5 M

Hz

3737

.5 M

Hz

3766

.5 M

Hz

3795

.5 M

Hz

213

MH

z

68 M

Hz

4003

.5 M

Hz

4200

MHz

29 M

Hz

3824

.5 M

Hz

3853

.5 M

Hz

3882

.5 M

Hz

3911

.5 M

Hz

3940

.5 M

Hz

3969

.5 M

Hz

4037

.5 M

Hz

4066

.5 M

Hz

4095

.5 M

Hz

4124

.5 M

Hz

4153

.5 M

Hz

4182

.5 M

Hz

3611

.5 M

Hz

Page 308: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-4

Fig. 11-4: ITU-R F.497 sim. Russia

266

MH

z

70 M

Hz

3653

.5 M

Hz

28 M

Hz

3422

.5 M

Hz

3450

.5 M

Hz

3478

.5 M

Hz

3506

.5 M

Hz

3534

.5 M

Hz

3562

.5 M

Hz

3590

.5 M

Hz

3618

.5 M

Hz

3688

.5 M

Hz

3716

.5 M

Hz

3744

.5 M

Hz

3772

.5 M

Hz

3800

.5 M

Hz

3828

.5 M

Hz

3856

.5 M

Hz

3884

.5 M

Hz

Page 309: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-5

Fig. 11-5: ITU-R F.635 A1

320

MH

z

80 M

Hz

3900

.0 M

Hz

3600

MHz

4200

.0 M

Hz

40 M

Hz

3620

.0 M

Hz

3660

.0 M

Hz

3700

.0 M

Hz

3740

.0 M

Hz

3780

.0 M

Hz

3820

.0 M

Hz

3860

.0 M

Hz

3940

.0 M

Hz

3980

.0 M

Hz

4020

.0 M

Hz

4060

.0 M

Hz

4100

MHz

4140

.0 M

Hz

4180

.0 M

Hz

320

MH

z

80 M

Hz

3900

.0 M

Hz

3600

MHz

4200

.0 M

Hz

40 M

Hz

3610

.0 M

Hz

3650

.0 M

Hz

3690

.0 M

Hz

3730

.0 M

Hz

3770

.0 M

Hz

3810

.0 M

Hz

3850

.0 M

Hz

3930

.0 M

Hz

3970

.0 M

Hz

4010

.0 M

Hz

4050

.0 M

Hz

4090

MHz

4130

.0 M

Hz

4170

.0 M

Hz

Page 310: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-6

Fig. 11-6: ITU-R F.635 A1 5a sim.

320

MH

z

3580

MHz

4200

MHz

80 M

Hz

3630

.0 M

Hz

3710

.0 M

Hz

3790

.0 M

Hz

3870

.0 M

Hz

3950

.0 M

Hz

4030

.0 M

Hz

4110

.0 M

Hz

4190

.0 M

Hz

Page 311: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-7

11.2 Channel patterns of the 5 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-7: ITU-R F.1099 A1

300

MH

z

60 M

Hz

4700

.0 M

Hz

4400

MHz

5000

MHz

80 M

Hz

4430

.0 M

Hz

4470

.0 M

Hz

4510

.0 M

Hz

4550

.0 M

Hz

4590

.0 M

Hz

4630

.0 M

Hz

4670

.0 M

Hz

4730

.0 M

Hz

4770

.0 M

Hz

4810

.0 M

Hz

4850

.0 M

Hz

4890

.0 M

Hz

4930

.0 M

Hz

4970

.0 M

Hz

Page 312: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-8

Fig. 11-8: ITU-R F.1099 A1 3 sim.

4990

.0 M

Hz

300

MH

z

60 M

Hz

4700

.0 M

Hz

4400

MHz

5000

MHz

80 M

Hz

4450

.0 M

Hz

4530

.0 M

Hz

4610

.0 M

Hz

4690

.0 M

Hz

4750

.0 M

Hz

4830

.0 M

Hz

4910

.0 M

Hz

Page 313: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-9

11.3 Channel patterns of the L6 RF band

Fig. 11-9: ITU-R F.497 Russia

266

MH

z

70 M

Hz

5920

.0 M

Hz

5670

MH

z61

70 M

Hz

28 M

Hz

5689

.0 M

Hz57

17.0

MHz

5745

.0 M

Hz57

73.0

MHz

5801

.0 M

Hz58

29.0

MHz

5857

.0 M

Hz58

85.0

MHz

5955

.0 M

Hz59

83.0

MHz

6011

.0 M

Hz60

39.0

MHz

6067

.0 M

Hz60

95.0

MH

z 6123

.0 M

Hz61

51.0

MHz

Page 314: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-10

Fig. 11-10: ITU-R F.383

252.

04 M

Hz

44.4

9 M

Hz

6175

.0 M

Hz

5925

MH

z64

25 M

Hz

29.6

5 M

Hz

5945

.20

MH

z5974

.85

MH

z 6004

.50

MH

z6034

.15

MH

z 6063

.80

MH

z6093

.45

MH

z 6123

.10

MH

z6152

.75

MH

z61

97.2

4 M

Hz62

26.8

9 M

Hz 62

56.8

9 M

Hz62

86.1

9 M

Hz 63

15.8

4 M

Hz63

45.4

9 M

Hz 63

75.1

4 M

Hz64

04.7

9 M

Hz

Page 315: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-11

11.4 Channel patters of the U6 RF band

Fig. 11-11: ITU-R F.384

340

MH

z

60 M

Hz

6770

.0 M

Hz

6430

MHz

7110

MHz

40 M

Hz

6460

.0 M

Hz

6500

.0 M

Hz

6540

.0 M

Hz

6580

.0 M

Hz

6620

.0 M

Hz

6660

.0 M

Hz

6700

.0 M

Hz

6740

.0 M

Hz

6800

.0 M

Hz

6840

.0 M

Hz

6880

.0 M

Hz

6920

.0 M

Hz

6960

.0 M

Hz

7000

.0 M

Hz 70

40.0

MH

z70

80.0

MH

z

Page 316: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-12

11.5 Channel patterns of the 7 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-12: ITU-R F. 385 A1 + alt.

154

MH

z

42 M

Hz

7575

.0 M

Hz

7425

MHz

7725

MHz

28 M

Hz

7442

.0 M

Hz

7470

.0 M

Hz

7498

.0 M

Hz

7526

.0 M

Hz

7554

.0 M

Hz

7596

.0 M

Hz

7624

.0 M

Hz

7652

.0 M

Hz

7680

.0 M

Hz

7708

.0 M

Hz

182

MH

z

70 M

Hz

7575

.0 M

Hz

7425

MHz

7725

MHz

28 M

Hz

7428

.0 M

Hz

7456

.0 M

Hz

7484

.0 M

Hz

7512

.0 M

Hz

7540

.0 M

Hz

7610

.0 M

Hz

7638

.0 M

Hz

7666

.0 M

Hz

7694

.0 M

Hz

7722

.0 M

Hz

Page 317: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-13

Fig. 11-13: ITU-R F.385 A3

196

MH

z

84 M

Hz

7275

.0 M

Hz

7110

.0 M

Hz

28 M

Hz

7121

.0 M

Hz

7149

.0 M

Hz

7177

.0 M

Hz

7205

. MHz

7233

.0 M

Hz

7317

.0 M

Hz

7345

.0 M

Hz

7373

.0 M

Hz

7401

.0 M

Hz

7429

.0 M

Hz

168

MH

z

56 M

Hz

7597

.0 M

Hz

7750

.0 M

Hz

28 M

Hz

7457

.0 M

Hz

7485

.0 M

Hz

7513

.0 M

Hz

7541

.0 M

Hz

7569

.0 M

Hz

7625

.0 M

Hz

7653

.0 M

Hz

7681

.0 M

Hz

7709

.0 M

Hz

7737

.0 M

Hz

Page 318: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-14

Fig. 11-14: ITU-R F.385 A4

245

MH

z

49 M

Hz

7662

.5 M

Hz

7425

.0 M

Hz79

00.0

MHz

28 M

Hz

7442

.0 M

Hz74

70.0

MHz

7498

.0 M

Hz75

26.0

MHz

7554

.0 M

Hz75

82.0

MHz

7610

.0 M

Hz76

38.0

MHz

7687

.0 M

Hz77

15.0

MHz

7743

.0 M

Hz77

71.0

MHz

7799

.0 M

Hz78

27.0

MHz

7855

.0 M

Hz78

83.0

MHz

Page 319: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-15

11.6 Channel patterns of the 8 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-15: ITU-R F.386 A1

331.

32 M

Hz

103.

77 M

Hz

8000

.0 M

Hz

7725

.0 M

Hz

8275

.0 M

Hz

29.6

5 M

Hz

7747

.70

MH

z7777

.35

MH

z 7807

.00

MH

z7836

.65

MH

z 7866

.30

MH

z7895

.95

MH

z 7925

.60

MH

z7955

.25

MH

z80

59.0

2 M

Hz80

88.6

7 M

Hz 81

18.3

2 M

Hz81

47.9

7 M

Hz 81

77.6

2 M

Hz82

07.2

7 M

Hz 82

36.9

2 M

Hz82

66.5

7 M

Hz

Page 320: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-16

Fig. 11-16: ITU-R F.386 A3 sim.

119

MH

z

63 M

Hz

8387

.5 M

Hz

8275

.0 M

Hz

8500

.0 M

Hz

28 M

Hz

8293

.0 M

Hz

8321

.0 M

Hz

8349

.0 M

Hz

8412

.0 M

Hz

8440

.0 M

Hz

8468

.0 M

Hz

Page 321: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Channel Patterns

RF/160 OI 11-17

Fig. 11-17: ITU-R F.386 A4

266

MH

z

70 M

Hz

8157

MH

z

7900

MHz

8400

MHz

28 M

Hz

7926

MHz

7954

MHz

7982

MH

z80

10 M

Hz80

38 M

Hz80

66 M

Hz80

94 M

Hz81

22 M

Hz81

92 M

Hz82

20 M

Hz82

48 M

Hz82

76 M

Hz83

04 M

Hz83

32 M

Hz83

60 M

Hz83

88 M

Hz

Page 322: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Channel Patterns Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI11-18

11.7 Channel patterns of the 13 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-18: ITU-R F.497

266

MH

z

70 M

Hz

1299

6.0

MH

z

28 M

Hz

1276

5.0

MH

z1279

3.0

MH

z 1282

1.0

MH

z1284

9.0

MH

z 1287

7.0

MH

z1290

5.0

MH

z 1293

3.0

MH

z13

031.

0 M

Hz13

059.

0 M

Hz 13

087.

0 M

Hz13

115.

0 M

Hz 13

143.

0 M

Hz13

171.

0 M

Hz 13

199.

0 M

Hz13

227.

0 M

Hz

1296

1.0

MH

z

1275

0.0

MH

z13

250.

0 M

Hz

Page 323: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Frequency Setting

RF/160 OI 12-1

12 Frequency Setting

12.1 Frequency setting in the 3.6 GHz RF band

3.6 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.497 Annex 1)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 3422.53450.5

3478.53506.5

3534.53562.5

3590.53618.5

3688.53716.5

3744.53772.5

3800.53828.5

3856.53884.5

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 3562.53590.5

3618.53646.5

3394.53422.5

3450.53478.5

3828.53856.5

3884.53912.5

3660.53688.5

3716.53744.5

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.6 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.382 China)

29 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a 2a, 3a 4a, 5a 6a 1b 2b, 3b 4b, 5b 6b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 3413 34423471

35003529

3558 3626 36553684

37133742

3771

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 3553 35823611

33603389

3418 3766 37953824

35733602

3631

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 324: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Frequency Setting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI12-2

12.2 Frequency setting in the 3.9 GHz RF band

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635 Annex 1)

40MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a 1b 2b, 3b 4b, 5b 6b, 7b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 36203660

37003740

37803820

3860 3940 39804020

40604100

41404180

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 37603800

38403880

36403680

3720 4080 41204160

39203960

40004040

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635 Annex 1 with 10 MHz offset)

40MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Ch. acc. to ITU-R F.635 A1 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a 1b 2b, 3b 4b, 5b 6b, 7b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 36103650

36903730

37703810

3850 3930 39704010

40504090

41304170

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 37503790

38303870

36303670

3710 4070 41104150

39103950

39904030

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635 Annex 1, chapter 5a)

80MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a 3a 5a 7a 1b 3b 5b 7b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 3630 3710 3790 3870 3950 4030 4110 4190

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 3770 3850 3650 3730 4090 4170 3970 4050

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 325: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Frequency Setting

RF/160 OI 12-3

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.382)

29 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 7a, 8a,9a

1a, 2a,3a

7b, 8b,9b

4a, 5a,6a

1b 2b, 3b 4b, 5b 6b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 3737.53766.53795.5

3824.53853.53882.5

3611.53640.53669.5

3911.53940.53969.5

4037.5 4066.54095.5

4124.54153.5

4182.5

Oscillator frequency [MHz] 3877.53906.53935.5

3964.53993.54022.5

3471.53500.53529.5

3771.53800.53829.5

4177.5 4206.54235.5

3984.54013.5

4042.5

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635, chapter 6)

30 MHzLower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a,3a

4a, 5a 6a, 7a 8a, 9a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b,9b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 3620

3650

3680

3710

3740

3770

3800

3830

3860

3940

3970

4000

4030

4060

4090

4120

4150

4180

Oscillator frequency [MHz] 3760

3790

3820

3850

3880

3630

3660

3690

3720

4080

4110

4140

4170

3920

3950

3980

4010

4040

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 326: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Frequency Setting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI12-4

12.3 Frequency setting in the 4.7 GHz RF band

4.7 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.1099)

40 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a 1b 2b, 3b 4b, 5b 6b, 7b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 44304470

45104550

45904630

4670 4730 47704810

48504890

49304970

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 45704610

46504690

44504490

4530 4870 49104950

47104750

47904830

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

4.7 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.1099 Annex 1, chapter 3)

80 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Sideband no. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Channels 1a 3a 5a 7a 1b 3b 5b 7b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 4450 4530 4610 4690 4750 4830 4910 4990

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 4590 4670 4470 4550 4890 4970 4770 4850

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 327: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Frequency Setting

RF/160 OI 12-5

12.4 Frequency setting in the 6.2 GHz RF band

6.2 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.383)

29.65 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 5945.205974.85

6004.506034.15

6063.806093.45

6123.106152.75

6197.246226.89

6256.546286.19

6315.846345.49

6375.146404.79

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 6085.206114.85

6144.506174.15

5923.805953.45

5983.106012.75

6337.246366.89

6396.546426.19

6175.846205.49

6235.146264.79

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

6.2 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.497 Russia)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a / 2a 3a / 4a 5a / 6a 7a / 8a 1b / 2b 3b / 4b 5b / 6b 7b / 8b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 56895717

57455773

58015829

58575884

59555983

60116039

60676095

61236151

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 58295857

58855913

56615689

57175745

60956123

61516179

59275955

59836011

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 328: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Frequency Setting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI12-6

12.5 Frequency setting in the 6.8 GHz RF band

6.8 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.384)

40 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 64606500

65406580

66206660

67006740

68006840

68806920

69607000

70407080

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 66006640

66806720

64806520

65606600

69406980

70207060

68206860

69006940

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 329: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Frequency Setting

RF/160 OI 12-7

12.6 Frequency setting in the 7 GHz RF band

7.5 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.385 Annex 1)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a 2a 3a, 4a 5a 1b, 2b 3b 4b 5b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 7442 7470 74987526

7554 75967624

7652 7680 7708

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 7302 7330 73587386

7414 77367764

7792 7820 7848

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

7.5 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.385 Annex 1 alternatively)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a 4a 5a 1b 2b, 3b 4b 5b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 74287456

7484 7512 7540 7610 76387666

7694 7722

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 72887316

7344 7372 7400 7750 77787806

7834 7862

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

7.5 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.385 Annex 4)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a 4a, 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b,5b

6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies [MHz] 74427470

7498 752675547582

76107638

76877715

774377717799

7827 78557883

Oscillator frequencies [MHz] 75827610

7638 738674147442

74707498

78277855

788379117939

7687 77157743

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 330: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Frequency Setting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI12-8

12.7 Frequency setting in the 8 GHz RF band

8.0 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.386 Annex 1)

29.65 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies[MHz]

7747.707777.35

7807.007836.65

7866.307895.95

7925.607955.25

8059.028088.67

8118.328147.97

8177.628207.27

8236.928266.57

Oscillator frequencies[MHz]

7887.707917.35

7947.007976.65

7726.307755.95

7785.607815.25

8199.028228.67

8258.328287.97

8037.628067.27

8096.928126.57

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

8.0 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.386 Annex 3)

29.65 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a 2a 3a 1b 2b 3b

Channel frequencies[MHz]

8293 8321 8349 8412 8440 8468

Oscillator frequencies[MHz]

8153 8181 8209 8552 8580 8608

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

8.0 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.386 Annex 4)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels acc. to ITU RF.386 A4

1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies[MHz]

79267954

79828010

80388066

80948122

81928220

82488276

83048332

83608388

Oscillator frequencies[MHz]

80668094

81228150

78987926

79547982

83328360

83888416

81648192

82208248

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 331: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Frequency Setting

RF/160 OI 12-9

12.8 Frequency setting in the 13 GHz RF band

13 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.497)

28 MHz

Lower subband Upper subband

Subband no. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Channels 1a, 2a 3a, 4a 5a, 6a 7a, 8a 1b, 2b 3b, 4b 5b, 6b 7b, 8b

Channel frequencies[MHz]

1276512793

1282112849

1287712905

1293312961

1303113059

1308713115

1314313171

1319913227

Oscillator frequency [MHz] 1290512933

1296112989

1273712765

1279312821

1317113199

1322713255

1300313031

1305913087

Overlaying * X X X X

Underlaying * X X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

Page 332: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Frequency Setting Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI12-10

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 333: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-1

13 Connectors

The following connectors are made available by the system:

SMA

1.6/5.6

Sub-D 9-pin

Sub-D 15-pin

Sub-D 25-pin

Sub-D 37-pin

Sub-D 3-pin

Optical connectors for monomode fibers:

Euro 2000

DIN 47256

SCPC

Waveguide connectors PDR... in compliance with IEC-154.

- +

Page 334: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-2

13.1 Connectors of the transmitter (Tx)

Tx

X1 SMA f RFPin Signal In/Out Level RF

1 RF �� RF output, main antenna

Tx

X2 1.6/5.6 f IFPin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF �� -10 dBm IF input from MD

Tx

X3 Sub-D 3p m BATPin Signal In/Out Level Supply voltage

1 - 19...75 V DC Floating2 BAT - ��

3 BAT + ��

Tx

X5 Sub-D 9p m OPTPin Signal In/Out Level Rack fan

1 Connector for optional rack fan2 LFT_EA_C3 LFT_ST_A4 Ground5 -6 Ground7 LFT_ES_A8 Ground9 LFT_STSP_C

Page 335: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-3

Tx oscillator

X1 1.6/5.6 f SYNPin Signal In/Out Level DRVCO synchronization

1 LO �� Synchronization frequency

Tx oscillator

X2 1.6/5.6 f SYNPin Signal In/Out Level DRVCO synchronization

1 LO �� Synchronization frequency

Page 336: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-4

13.2 Connectors of the main and diversity receiver (Rx and RxD)

Rx

X1 SMA f RFPin Signal In/Out Level RF

1 RF �� RF input - main antenna

Rx

X2 1.6/5.6 f IFPin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF �� -10dBm IF output to the DM or IF combiner

Rx

X3 Sub-D 3p m BATPin Signal In/Out Level Supply voltage

1 - 19...75 V DC Floating2 BAT - ��

3 BAT + ��

Key word 13-1: Rx/RxD recorder port

Rx

X5 Sub-D 15p m RECPin Signal In/Out Level Recorder port

1 Ground2 AGC Main �� 0..5 V Rx level - main antenna3 AGC Div. �� 0..5 V Rx level - diversity antenna4 -5 Tx level - station B �� 0..5 V Tx level of the far end (not with HSB)6 ATPC status �� 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 V ATPC status7 FFI residual error ratio �� CMOS Residual error pulses8 Ground9 sin� �� 0...5 V

10 cos� �� 0...5 V11 AGC-out combiner �� 1...3 V12 Combiner distortion �� Distortion of combiner13 Lock DM �� CMOS Demodulator locking status14 BB DM distortion �� Distortion of BB demodulator15 -

Page 337: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-5

Rx oscillator

X1 1.6/5.6 f SYNPin Signal In/Out Level DRVCO synchronization

1 LO �� Synchronization frequency

Rx oscillator

X2 1.6/5.6 f SYNPin Signal In/Out Level DRVCO synchronization

1 LO �� Synchronization frequency

Page 338: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-6

RxD

X21 SMA f RFPin Signal In/Out Level RF

1 RF �� RF input - diversity antenna

RxD

X22 1.6/5.6 f IFPin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF �� -10dBm IF from diversity receiver

RxD

X23 1.6/5.6 f IF-COMBPin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF �� -10dBm IF combiner input #1

RxD

X24 1.6/5.6 f IF-COMBPin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF �� -10dBm IF combiner input #2

RxD

X25 1.6/5.6 f IF-COMBPin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF �� -10dBm IF combiner output to DM

Page 339: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-7

13.3 Connectors of the Modem Unit

Modem Unit

X70 Sub-D 37p m DCCRPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 Ground V.11 D1...D3 192 kbit/s in the SOH2 CL B Line OP �� positive3 D B Line OP ��

4 CL B Line OP ��

5 D B Line OP ��

6 CL B Radio OP ��

7 D B Radio OP ��

8 CL B Radio OP ��

9 D B Radio OP ��

10 CL B Line PR ��

11 D B Line PR ��

12 CL B Line PR ��

13 D B Line PR ��

14 CL B Radio PR ��

15 D B Radio PR ��

16 CL B Radio PR ��

17 D B Radio PR ��

18 Ground19 Ground20 Ground21 CL A Line OP �� negative22 D A Line OP23 CL A Line OP ��

24 D A Line OP ��

25 CL A Radio OP ��

Page 340: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-8

Modem Unit

X70 Sub-D 37p m DCCRPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

26 D A Radio OP ��

27 CL A Radio OP ��

28 D A Radio OP ��

29 CL A Line PR ��

30 D A Line PR ��

31 CL A Line PR ��

32 D A Line PR ��

33 CL A Radio PR ��

34 D A Radio PR ��

35 CL A Radio PR ��

36 D A Radio PR ��

37 Ground

Page 341: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-9

Modem Unit

X71 Sub-D 3p m BAT 1Pin Signal In/Out Supply voltage

1 - Level 1st channel2 BAT 1 - �� 19...75 V DC3 BAT 1 + ��

Modem Unit

X72 Sub-D 3p m BAT 2Pin Signal In/Out Level Supply voltage

1 - 19...75 V DC 2nd channel 19...75 V DC2 BAT 2 - ��

3 BAT 2 + ��

Modem Unit

X73 1.6/5.6 f IF1Pin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF-MD1 �� -10 dBm Modulator IF signal - 1st channel

Modem Unit

X74 1.6/5.6 f IF1Pin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF-DM1 �� -10 dBm Demodulator IF signal - 1st channel

Modem Unit

X75 1.6/5.6 f IF2Pin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF-MD2 �� -10 dBm Modulator IF signal - 2nd channel

Modem Unit

X76 1.6/5.6 f IF2Pin Signal In/Out Level IF

1 IF-DM2 �� -10 dBm Demodulator IF signal - 2nd channel

Page 342: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-10

Modem Unit

X77 Sub-D 15p m MST-ADRPin Signal In/Out Level Addresses

1 ADR A0 �� MU address connector2 ADR A2 �� Bit A0...A5 - left modem3 ADR A4 �� Bit B0...B5 - right modem4 ADR B0 ��

5 ADR B2 ��

6 ADR B4 ��

7 Fan a ��

8 Fan b ��

9 ADR A1 ��

10 ADR A3 ��

11 ADR A5 ��

12 ADR B1 ��

13 ADR B3 ��

14 ADR B5 ��

15 Ground

Modem Unit

X78 Sub-D 15p f RCPin Signal In/Out Level Alarm relays

1 Ground �� Control for optional relay module2 +5.2 V ��

3 LA Tx OP ��

4 LA Rx OP ��

5 LA Tx PR ��

6 LA Rx PR ��

7 +5.2 V ��

8 Ground ��

9 Ground ��

10 +5.2 V ��

11 EA Tx OP ��

12 EA Rx OP ��

13 EA Tx PR ��

14 EA Rx PR ��

15 +5.2 V

Page 343: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-11

Modem UnitX79 Sub-D 9p m BFI-ESGPin Signal In/Out Level Error pulses

1 LA/EA Rx B OP �� V.11 RPS bit error pulses2 BFI B OP �� positive3 LA/EA Rx B PR ��

4 BFI B PR ��

5 Ground ��

6 LA/EA Rx A OP �� negative7 BFI A OP ��

8 LA/EA Rx A PR ��

9 BFI A PR ��

Modem Unit

X81 Sub-D 9p f LON WPin Signal In/Out Level

12 N_LON34567 LON89

Modem Unit

X82 Sub-D 9p m LON EPin Signal In/Out Level

12 N_LON34567 LON89

Page 344: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-12

Modem Unit

X89 1.6/5.6 f PR1/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 CMI OP �� CMI BB to RPSC #2

Modem Unit

X90 1.6/5.6 f PR1/2Pin Signal In/Out BB STM-1

1 CMI OP �� CMI BB to RPSC #2

Modem Unit

X91 1.6/5.6 f PR1/1Pin Signal In/Out BB STM-1

1 CMI OP �� CMI BB to RPSC #1

Modem Unit

X92 1.6/5.6 f PR1/1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 CMI OP �� CMI BB to RPSC #1

Page 345: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-13

Modem Unit

X95 1.6/5.6 f PR2/1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 CMI PR �� CMI BB to RPSC #1

Modem Unit

X96 1.6/5.6 f PR2/1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 CMI PR �� CMI BB to RPSC #1

Modem Unit

X99 1.6/5.6 f PR2/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 CMI PR �� CMI BB to RPSC #2

Modem Unit

X100 1.6/5.6 f PR2/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 CMI PR �� CMI BB to RPSC #2

Page 346: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-14

13.3.1 Connectors of the SPI El. and SPI Opt. module

SPI Electrical

X1 1.6/5.6 f STM-1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 STM-1 �� CMI BB

SPI Electrical

X2 1.6/5.6 f STM-1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 STM-1 �� CMI BB

SPI Electrical

X3 1.6/5.6 f STM-1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 STM-1 �� CMI BB test socket

SPI Optical

X... DIN 47256, Euro 2000, SCPC STM-1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB STM-1

1 STM-1 �� -10 dBm BB NRZ 1310 nm monomode

Page 347: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-15

13.4 Connectors of the Overhead Access Unit

Fig. 13-1: OHAU block diagram

E2 64 kbit/s V.11 1+0

West 2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 120

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

E1 64 kbit/s 1+1

SOH ExtensionModule

OHAUPS

19...75 V

19...75 V

East

SOH Access Module

SISA 0/N

Q InterfaceModule

SISA K

Q E RS 485 LON E

F RS 232

64 kbit/s G.703 1+1 / V.11Q RS 485F RS 232

RFCOHModule East

RFCOHModule West

PSTN EOWBranch

EOW Module #1

EOW Module #2

Remote Handset

Analog0.3-3.4 kHz

RFCOH RFCOH

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

2 Mbit/s 1+1 120

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

64 kbit/s 1+1

North

2W / 6W

F1 64 kbit/s 1+1

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 75�X113/114X115/116

X76

X56

X52

X54

X71

�2 Mbit/s 1+1 75X109/110X111/112

X74

X60

X32

PSTN EOWBranch

X35

X33

X36

X40

X41

X34

X37X31

X32

X35

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

2 Mbit/s 1+1 120

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

�2 Mbit/s 1+1 75

ext. 4x64 kbit/s 1+1

Q CON RS 485

E2 64 kbit/s V.11 1+0

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 120

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

E1 64 kbit/s 1+1

F1 64 kbit/s 1+1

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 75� X105/106X107/108

X75

X55

X51

X53

X1

LON W

Q W RS 485 X82X81

X39 X38

X1

X43

X47

X42

X101/102X103/104

X73

X59

X30

X45X46

X67 OP

X68 PR

X65 OP

X66 PR

SOHX61 OP

X62 PRSOH

X63 OP

X64 PR

LAN (10Base-T)Q RS485F RS 232ECC Gateway

Module

SISA-V(K)Q RS485

X601X43

X42

X600

Alternatively to the QD2 interfacemodule, the ECC Gateway

module can be used.

Page 348: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-16

Overhead Access Unit

X30 Sub-D 9p m EOW 1 EXTPin Signal In/Out Level External service channels in EOW1 module

1 DSC1 a OP �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm East2 DSC1 a OP �� Only without Radio East direction3 DSC2 a PR ��

4 DSC2 a PR ��

5 Ground6 DSC1 b OP ��

7 DSC1 b OP ��

8 DSC2 b PR ��

9 DSC2 b PR ��

Overhead Access Unit

X31 Sub-D 9p m EOW 2 EXTPin Signal In/Out Level External service channels in EOW2 module

1 DSC1 a OP �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm East2 DSC1 a OP �� Only without Radio East direction3 DSC2 a PR ��

4 DSC2 a PR ��

5 Ground6 DSC1 b OP ��

7 DSC1 b OP ��

8 DSC2 b PR ��

9 DSC2 b PR ��

Page 349: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-17

Overhead Access Unit

X32 Sub-D 9p m EOW 1 EXT SPin Signal In/Out Level 2W/6W PSTN via EOW1

1 PSTN 2 a �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm2 PSTN 1 a �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm3 PSTN 2 S1 ��

4 Telephone L a Remote parallel telephone set5 Ground6 PSTN 2 b �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm7 PSTN 1 b �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm8 PSTN 2 S1 ��

9 Telephone L b Remote parallel telephone set

Overhead Access Unit

X33 Sub-D 9p m EOW 1 APin Signal In/Out Level External analog service channels via EOW1

1 -2 -3 D a OP �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm4 D a OP �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm5 Ground6 -7 -8 D b OP �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm9 D b OP �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

Page 350: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-18

Overhead Access Unit

X34 Sub-D 9p m EOW 1Pin Signal In/Out Level Service channels via EOW1 branching

1 N1 a OP �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm North2 N1 a OP ��

3 N2 a OP ��

4 N2 a OP ��

5 Ground6 N1 b OP ��

7 N1 b OP ��

8 N2 b OP ��

9 N2 b OP ��

Overhead Access Unit

X35 Sub-D 9p m EOW 2 EXT SPin Signal In/Out Level 2W/6W PSTN via EOW1

1 PSTN 2 a �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm2 PSTN 1 a �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm3 PSTN 2 S1 ��

4 Telephone L a Remote parallel telephone set5 Ground6 PSTN 2 b �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm7 PSTN 1 b �� analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm8 PSTN 2 S1 ��

9 Telephone L b Remote parallel telephone set

Page 351: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-19

Overhead Access Unit

X36 Sub-D 9p m EOW 2 APin Signal In/Out Level External analog service channels via EOW2

1 - 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm2 -3 D a PR ��

4 D a PR ��

5 Ground6 -7 -8 D b PR ��

9 D b PR ��

Overhead Access Unit

X37 Sub-D 9p m EOW 2 NPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels via EOW2 branching

1 N1 a PR �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm North2 N1 a PR ��

3 N2 a PR ��

4 N2 a PR ��

5 Ground6 N1 b PR ��

7 N1 b PR ��

8 N2 b PR ��

9 N2 b PR ��

Page 352: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-20

Overhead Access Unit

X38 Sub-D 15p m Q EPin Signal In/Out Level SISA-0

1 Ground RS 485 Station bus (Slave) East2 RS 485 Ta �� to next unit or X42/43 at QD23 -4 RS 485 Ra ��

5 -6 -7 -8 Ground9 RS 485 Tb ��

10 -11 RS 485 Rb ��

12 -13 -14 -15 -

Overhead Access Unit

X39 Sub-D 15p m Q WPin Signal In/Out Level SISA-0

1 Ground RS 485 Station bus (Slave) West2 RS 485 Ta �� to next unit or X42/43 at QD23 -4 RS 485 Ra ��

5 -6 -7 -8 Ground9 RS 485 Tb ��

10 -11 RS 485 Rb ��

12 -13 -14 -15 -

Page 353: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-21

Overhead Access Unit

X40 Sub-D 9p m EOW 1 INT SPin Signal In/Out Level Analog telephone connection to EOW1

1 -2 -3 Telephone L a analog Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm4 -5 Ground6 -7 Telephone L b analog Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm8 -9

Overhead Access Unit

X41 Sub-D 9p m EOW 2 INT SPin Signal In/Out Level Analog telephone connection to EOW2

1 -2 -3 Telephone L a analog Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm4 -5 Ground6 -7 Telephone L b analog Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm8 -9

Overhead Access Unit

X42a Sub-D 15p m Q CONPin Signal In/Out Level SISA

1 Ground RS 485 SISA-K QD22 RS 485 ST Ta �� With relay and terminal station operation / Master3 -4 RS 485 ST Ra ��

5 -6 -7 -8 Ground9 RS 485 ST Tb ��

10 -11 RS 485 ST Rb ��

12 -13 -14 -15 -

Page 354: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-22

Overhead Access Unit

X42b Sub-D 15p m Q CONPin Signal In/Out Level SISA

1 Ground RS 485 SISA-K QD22 RS 485 ST Ra �� With headend operation / Slave3 -4 RS 485 ST Ta ��

5 -6 -7 -8 Ground9 RS 485 ST Rb ��

10 -11 RS 485 ST Tb ��

12 -13 -14 -15 -

Overhead Access Unit

X43a Sub-D 15p m Q LOCPin Signal In/Out Level Q-Management

1 Ground RS 485 QD2 station bus (pseudo-bus)2 RS 485 ST Ta �� With relay and terminal station operation / Master3 -4 RS 485 ST Ra ��

5 -6 -7 -8 Ground9 RS 485 ST Tb ��

10 -11 RS 485 ST Rb ��

12 -13 -14 -15 -

Page 355: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-23

Overhead Access Unit

X43b Sub-D 15p m Q LOCPin Signal In/Out Level Q-Management

1 Ground RS 485 QD2 station bus (pseudo-bus)2 RS 485 ST Ra �� With headend operation / Slave3 -4 RS 485 ST Ta ��

5 -6 -7 -8 Ground9 RS 485 ST Rb ��

10 -11 RS 485 ST Tb ��

12 -13 -14 -15 -

Overhead Access Unit

X45 Sub-D 25p m SOH E2 EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 E2D B OP �� V.11 64 kbit/s E2 byte in SOH East2 E2CL B OP �� positive3 E2S B OP ��

4 E2D B OP ��

5 E2CL B OP ��

6 E2S B OP ��

7 E2D B PR ��

8 E2CL B PR ��

9 E2S B PR ��

10 E2D B PR ��

11 E2CL B PR ��

12 E2S B PR ��

13 Ground14 E2D A OP �� negative15 E2CL A OP ��

16 E2S A OP ��

17 E2D A OP ��

18 E2CL A OP ��

19 E2S A OP ��

20 E2D A PR ��

21 E2CL A PR ��

22 E2S A PR ��

23 E2D A PR ��

24 E2CL A PR ��

25 E2S A PR ��

Page 356: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-24

Overhead Access Unit

X46 Sub-D 25p m SOH E2 WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 E2D B OP �� V.11 64 kbit/s E2 byte in SOH West2 E2CL B OP �� positive3 E2S B OP ��

4 E2D B OP ��

5 E2CL B OP ��

6 E2S B OP ��

7 E2D B PR ��

8 E2CL B PR ��

9 E2S B PR ��

10 E2D B PR ��

11 E2CL B PR ��

12 E2S B PR ��

13 Ground14 E2D A OP �� negative15 E2CL A OP ��

16 E2S A OP ��

17 E2D A OP ��

18 E2CL A OP ��

19 E2S A OP ��

20 E2D A PR ��

21 E2CL A PR ��

22 E2S A PR ��

23 E2D A PR ��

24 E2CL A PR ��

25 E2S A PR ��

Overhead Access Unit

X47a Sub-D 9p m QSC EXTPin Signal In/Out Level Q-Management

1 QD D B OP �� V.11 External QD2 signal2 QD CL B PR �� positive3 QD D B OP ��

4 QD CL B PR ��

5 Ground6 QD D A OP �� negative7 QD CL A PR ��

8 QD D A OP ��

9 QD CL A PR ��

Page 357: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-25

Overhead Access Unit

X47b Sub-D 9p m QSC EXTPin Signal In/Out Level Q-Management

1 QD D a OP �� 64 kbit/s cod. Ext. QD2 signal acc. to ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm2 QD D a PR ��

3 QD D a OP ��

4 QD D a PR ��

5 Ground6 QD D b OP ��

7 QD D b PR ��

8 QD D b OP ��

9 QD D b PR ��

Overhead Access Unit

X51 Sub-D 9p m SOH E1 EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 E1 b �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm E1 byte in SOH East2 -3 E1 b ��

4 -5 Ground6 E1 a ��

7 -8 E1 a ��

9 -

Overhead Access Unit

X52 Sub-D 9p m SOH E1 WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 E1 b �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm E1 byte in SOH West2 -3 E1 b ��

4 -5 Ground6 E1 a ��

7 -8 E1 a ��

9 -

Page 358: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-26

Overhead Access Unit

X53 Sub-D 9p m SOH F1 EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 F1 b �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm F1 byte in SOH East2 -3 F1 b ��

4 -5 Ground6 F1 a ��

7 -8 F1 a ��

9 -

Overhead Access Unit

X54 Sub-D 9p m SOH F1 WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 F1 b �� 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm F1 byte in SOH West2 -3 F1 b ��

4 -5 Ground6 F1 a ��

7 -8 F1 a ��

9 -

Page 359: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-27

Overhead Access Unit

X55 Sub-D 25p m DSC 9...12 EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 Ground 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm 4x64 k in SOH East2 DSC9 b ��

3 DSC9 b ��

4 Ground5 DSC10 b ��

6 DSC10 b ��

7 Ground8 DSC11 b ��

9 DSC11 b ��

10 Ground11 DSC12 b ��

12 DSC12 b ��

13 Ground14 Ground15 DSC9 a ��

16 DSC9 a ��

17 Ground18 DSC10 a ��

19 DSC10 a ��

20 Ground21 DSC11 a ��

22 DSC11 a ��

23 Ground24 DSC12 a ��

25 DSC12 a ��

Page 360: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-28

Overhead Access Unit

X56 Sub-D 25p m DSC 9...12 WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 Ground 64 kbit/s cod. G.703 120 Ohm 4x64 k in SOH West2 DSC9 b ��

3 DSC9 b ��

4 Ground5 DSC10 b ��

6 DSC10 b ��

7 Ground8 DSC11 b ��

9 DSC11 b ��

10 Ground11 DSC12 b ��

12 DSC12 b ��

13 Ground14 Ground15 DSC9 a ��

16 DSC9 a ��

17 Ground18 DSC10 a ��

19 DSC10 a ��

20 Ground21 DSC11 a ��

22 DSC11 a ��

23 Ground24 DSC12 a ��

25 DSC12 a ��

Page 361: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-29

Overhead Access Unit

X59 Sub-D 37p m DSC 1...8 EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 Ground 64 kbit/s cod. G.703 120 Ohm 8x64 k in RFCOH East2 DSC1 b ��

3 DSC1 b ��

4 DSC2 b ��

5 DSC2 b ��

6 DSC3 b ��

7 DSC3 b ��

8 DSC4 b ��

9 DSC4 b ��

10 DSC5 b ��

11 DSC5 b ��

12 DSC6 b ��

13 DSC6 b ��

14 DSC7 b ��

15 DSC7 b ��

16 DSC8 b ��

17 DSC8 b ��

18 Ground19 Ground20 Ground21 DSC1 a ��

22 DSC1 a ��

23 DSC2 a ��

24 DSC2 a ��

25 DSC3 a ��

26 DSC3 a ��

27 DSC4 a ��

28 DSC4 a ��

29 DSC5 a ��

30 DSC5 a ��

31 DSC6 a ��

32 DSC6 a ��

33 DSC7 a ��

34 DSC7 a ��

35 DSC8 a ��

36 DSC8 a ��

37 Ground

Page 362: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-30

Overhead Access Unit

X60 Sub-D 37p m DSC 1...8 WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 Ground 64 kbit/s cod. G.703 120 Ohm 8x64 k in RFCOH West2 DSC1 b ��

3 DSC1 b ��

4 DSC2 b ��

5 DSC2 b ��

6 DSC3 b ��

7 DSC3 b ��

8 DSC4 b ��

9 DSC4 b ��

10 DSC5 b ��

11 DSC5 b ��

12 DSC6 b ��

13 DSC6 b ��

14 DSC7 b ��

15 DSC7 b ��

16 DSC8 b ��

17 DSC8 b ��

18 Ground19 Ground20 Ground21 DSC1 a ��

22 DSC1 a ��

23 DSC2 a ��

24 DSC2 a ��

25 DSC3 a ��

26 DSC3 a ��

27 DSC4 a ��

28 DSC4 a ��

29 DSC5 a ��

30 DSC5 a ��

31 DSC6 a ��

32 DSC6 a ��

33 DSC7 a ��

34 DSC7 a ��

35 DSC8 a ��

36 DSC8 a ��

37 Ground

Page 363: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-31

Overhead Access Unit

X71 Sub-D 3p m BAT 1Pin Signal In/Out Level Supply voltage

1 - 19...75 V DC Floating2 BAT 1 - ��

3 BAT 1 + ��

Overhead Access Unit

X73 Sub-D 15p m ROH WSC EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k b OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in RFCOH East2 Ground3 2048 k b OP ��

4 Ground5 2048 k b PR ��

6 Ground7 2048 k b PR ��

8 Ground9 2048 k a OP ��

10 Ground11 2048 k a OP ��

12 Ground13 2048 k a PR ��

14 Ground15 2048 k a PR ��

Page 364: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-32

Overhead Access Unit

X74 Sub-D 15p m ROH WSC WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k b OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in RFCOH West2 Ground3 2048 k b OP ��

4 Ground5 2048 k b PR ��

6 Ground7 2048 k b PR ��

8 Ground9 2048 k a OP ��

10 Ground11 2048 k a OP ��

12 Ground13 2048 k a PR ��

14 Ground15 2048 k a PR ��

Page 365: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-33

Overhead Access Unit

X75 Sub-D 15p m SOH WSC EPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k b OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in SOH East2 Ground3 2048 k b OP ��

4 Ground5 2048 k b PR ��

6 Ground7 2048 k b PR ��

8 Ground9 2048 k a OP ��

10 Ground11 2048 k a OP ��

12 Ground13 2048 k a PR ��

14 Ground15 2048 k a PR ��

Overhead Access Unit

X76 Sub-D 15p m SOH WSC WPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k b OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in SOH West2 Ground3 2048 k b OP ��

4 Ground5 2048 k b PR ��

6 Ground7 2048 k b PR ��

8 Ground9 2048 k a OP ��

10 Ground11 2048 k a OP ��

12 Ground13 2048 k a PR ��

14 Ground15 2048 k a PR ��

Page 366: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-34

Overhead Access Unit

X81 Sub-D 9p f LON WPin Signal In/Out Level

12 N_LON34567 LON89

Overhead Access Unit

X82 Sub-D 9p m LON EPin Signal In/Out Level

12 N_LON34567 LON89

Overhead Access Unit

X101 1.6/5.6 f RE1 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Page 367: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-35

Overhead Access Unit

X102 1.6/5.6 f RE1 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Overhead Access Unit

X103 1.6/5.6 f RE2 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Overhead Access Unit

X104 1.6/5.6 f RE2 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Overhead Access Unit

X105 1.6/5.6 f SE1 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit

X106 1.6/5.6 f SE1 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit

X107 1.6/5.6 f SE2 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Page 368: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-36

Overhead Access Unit

X108 1.6/5.6 f SE2 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit

X109 1.6/5.6 f RW1 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X110 1.6/5.6 f RW1 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X111 1.6/5.6 f RW2 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X112 1.6/5.6 f RW2 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X113 1.6/5.6 f SW1 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Page 369: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-37

Overhead Access Unit

X114 1.6/5.6 f SW1 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k OP �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X115 1.6/5.6 f SW2 OUTPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X116 1.6/5.6 f SW2 INPin Signal In/Out Level Service channels

1 2048 k PR �� HDB-3 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Overhead Access Unit

X117 Sub-D 9p m RC SISAPin Signal In/Out Level Alarm inputs

1 SISA D1 �� Floating alarm contacts SISA (NO/NC)2 SISA D7 ��

3 SISA D3 ��

4 SISA D4 ��

5 SISA D5 ��

6 SISA D6 ��

7 SISA D7 ��

8 SISA D8 ��

9 Ground

Page 370: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-38

13.4.1 Connectors of SISA- 0/N and Q modules

SISA-0/N module in the OHAU

X1 Sub-D 9p f SISA-0/NPin Signal In/Out Level F-interface SISA-0/N

1 CDC RS 232 Local F-interface2 TxD for system configuration3 RxD4 DTR5 Ground6 DSR7 RTS8 CTS9

QTN module in the OHAU

X1 Sub-D 9p m QPin Signal In/Out Level F-interface SISA K

1 CDC RS 232 Local F-interface SISA-K2 TxD3 RxD4 DTR5 Ground6 DSR7 RTS8 CTS9

Page 371: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-39

13.5 Connectors of RPS-C and RPS-H modules

RPS-C

X10 1.6/5.6 f PR1/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 PR1/2 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 to PR1 or PR2

RPS-C

X11 1.6/5.6 f OP1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP1 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 OP1

RPS-C

X12 1.6/5.6 f OP2/9Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP2/9 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP2 or OP9

RPS-C

X13 1.6/5.6 f OP3/10Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP3/10 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP3 or OP10

RPS-C

X14 1.6/5.6 f OP4/11Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP4/11 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP4 or OP11

RPS-C

X15 1.6/5.6 f OP5/12Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP5/12 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP5 or OP12

Page 372: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-40

RPS-C

X16 1.6/5.6 f OP6/13Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP6/13 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP6 or OP13

RPS-C

X17 1.6/5.6 f OP7/14Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP7/14 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP7 or OP14

RPS-C

X18 1.6/5.6 f OP8Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP8 Tx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP8 or 2nd RPSC

RPS-C

X19 1.6/5.6 f PR1/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 PR1/2 �� CMI BB STM-1 from PR1 or PR2

RPS-C

X20 1.6/5.6 f PR1/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 PR1/2 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from PR1 or PR2

RPS-C

X21 1.6/5.6 f OP1Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP1 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP1

Page 373: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Connectors

RF/160 OI 13-41

RPS-C

X22 1.6/5.6 f OP2/9Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP2/9 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP2 or OP9

RPS-C

X23 1.6/5.6 f OP3/10Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP3/10 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP3 or OP10

RPS-C

X24 1.6/5.6 f OP4/11Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP4/11 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP4 or OP11

RPS-C

X25 1.6/5.6 f OP5/12Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP5/12 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP5 or OP12

RPS-C

X26 1.6/5.6 f OP6/13Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP6/13 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP6 or OP13

RPS-C

X27 1.6/5.6 f OP7/14Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP7/14 �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP7 or OP14

Page 374: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Connectors Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI13-42

RPS-C

X28 1.6/5.6 f OP8Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 OP8 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 from OP8 or 2nd RPS-C

RPS-C

X29 1.6/5.6 f PR1/2Pin Signal In/Out Level BB

1 PR1/2 Rx �� CMI BB STM-1 to PR1 or PR2

Page 375: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Ordering Information

RF/160 OI 14-1

14 Ordering Information14.1 CE complianceMarconi Communications GmbH declares that this product complies with the basic requirements of§ 3 and all other relevant regulations of the FTEG (Article 3 of R&TTE, 1999 / 05 / EC) provided that itis properly used and operated.

MDRS 155/. . .-64/128 MLQAM E EU guidelineCE label (example) R&TTE, 1999 / 05/EC

Approved, comprehensive qualityassurance system

Registration no.:Q811250M

to Annex 5,R&TTE 1999/05/EC

14.2 Ordering informationIdent. nos. Additional

remarksDrawing nos. CE declaration nos.

Transmitter 64 MLQAMAN00071970 MDRS 155/3900-64 Tx-E ITU-R-F.635 65.7214.200.00-001 65.7214.200.00CE001AN00103000 MDRS 155/3900-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.382 65.7214.200.00-002 65.7214.200.00CE002AN00065966 MDRS 155/4700-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.1099 65.7210.200.00-001 65.7210.200.00CE001AN00065967 MDRS 155/6200-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.383 65.7211.200.00-001 65.7211.200.00CE001AN00065302 MDRS 155/6800-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.384 65.7203.200.00-001 65.7203.200.00CE001AN00065969 MDRS 155/7500-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.385A1,3 65.7207.200.00-001 65.7207.200.00CE001AN00101311 MDRS 155/7500-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.385A4 65.7207.200.00-002 65.7207.200.00CE002AN00065970 MDRS 155/8000-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.386A1 65.7208.200.00-001 65.7208.200.00CE001AN00101312 MDRS 155/8000-64 Tx-E ITU-R F.386A4 65.7208.200.00-002 65.7208.200.00CE002

Transmitter 128 MLQAMAN00101794 MDRS 155/3600-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7231.200.00-001 65.7231.200.00CE001AN00101795 MDRS 155/3600-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7231.200.00-002 65.7231.200.00CE002AN00101796 MDRS 155/3900-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.382/497 65.7225.200.00-001 65.7225.200.00CE001AN00101798 MDRS 155/6200-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.383 65.7230.200.00-001 65.7230.200.00CE001AN00101799 MDRS 155/6200-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7230.200.00-002 65.7230.200.00CE002AN00097908 MDRS 155/7500-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.385A1,3 65.7229.200.00-001 65.7229.200.00CE001AN00097909 MDRS 155/7500-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.385A4 65.7229.200.00-002 65.7229.200.00CE002AN00097910 MDRS 155/7500-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.385A3 65.7229.200.00-003 65.7229.200.00CE003AN00097912 MDRS 155/8000-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.386A1 65.7228.200.00-001 65.7228.200.00CE001AN00097913 MDRS 155/8000-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.386A4 65.7228.200.00-002 65.7228.200.00CE002AN00097914 MDRS 155/8000-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.386A3 65.7228.200.00-003 65.7228.200.00CE003AN00090381 MDRS 155/13000-128 Tx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7222.200.00-001 65.7222.200.00CE001

Receiver 64 MLQAMAN00081131 MDRS 155/3900-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.635 65.7214.400.00-001 65.7214.400.00CE001AN00100926 MDRS 155/3900-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.382 65.7214.400.00-002 65.7214.400.00CE002AN00081132 MDRS 155/3900-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.635 65.7214.410.00-001 65.7214.410.00CE001AN00100927 MDRS 155/3900-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.382 65.7214.410.00-002 65.7214.410.00CE002AN00065979 MDRS 155/4700-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.1099 65.7210.400.00-001 65.7210.400.00CE001AN00066008 MDRS 155/4700-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.1099 65.7210.410.00-001 65.7210.410.00CE001AN00065980 MDRS 155/6200-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.383 65.7211.400.00-001 65.7211.400.00CE001AN00066009 MDRS 155/6200-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.383 65.7211.410.00-001 65.7211.410.00CE001AN00065981 MDRS 155/6800-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.384 65.7203.400.00-001 65.7203.400.00CE001AN00066010 MDRS 155/6800-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.384 65.7203.410.00-001 65.7203.410.00CE001AN00065982 MDRS 155/7500-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.385A1,3 65.7207.400.00-001 65.7207.400.00CE001AN00100928 MDRS 155/7500-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.385A4 65.7207.400.00-002 65.7207.400.00CE002AN00066011 MDRS 155/7500-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.385A1,3 65.7207.410.00-001 65.7207.410.00CE001AN00100929 MDRS 155/7500-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.385A4 65.7207.410.00-002 65.7207.410.00CE002

Page 376: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Ordering Information Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI14-2

Ident. nos. Additionalremarks

Drawing nos. CE declaration nos.

AN00065983 MDRS 155/8000-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.386A1 65.7208.400.00-001 65.7208.400.00CE001AN00100930 MDRS 155/8000-64 Rx-E ITU-R F.386A4 65.7208.400.00-002 65.7208.400.00CE002AN00066012 MDRS 155/8000-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.386A1 65.7208.410.00-001 65.7208.410.00CE001AN00100931 MDRS 155/8000-64 RxD-E ITU-R F.386A4 65.7208.410.00-002 65.7208.410.00CE002

Receiver 128 MLQAMAN00101800 MDRS 155/3600-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7231.400.00-001 65.7231.400.00CE001AN00101801 MDRS 155/3600-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7231.400.00-002 65.7231.400.00CE002AN00101803 MDRS 155/3600-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.497 65.7231.410.00-001 65.7231.410.00CE001AN00101804 MDRS 155/3600-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.497 65.7231.410.00-002 65.7231.410.00CE002AN00101807 MDRS 155/3900-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.382/497 65.7225.400.00-001 65.7225.400.00CE001AN00101810 MDRS 155/3900-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.382/497 65.7225.410.00-001 65.7225.410.00CE001AN00101812 MDRS 155/6200-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.383 65.7230.400.00-001 65.7230.400.00CE001AN00101813 MDRS 155/6200-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7230.400.00-002 65.7230.400.00CE002AN00101816 MDRS 155/6200-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.383 65.7230.410.00-001 65.7230.410.00CE001AN00101817 MDRS 155/6200-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.497 65.7230.410.00-002 65.7230.410.00CE002AN00097900 MDRS 155/7500-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.385A1,3 65.7229.200.00-001 65.7229.200.00CE001AN00097901 MDRS 155/7500-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.385A4 65.7229.200.00-002 65.7229.200.00CE002AN00097902 MDRS 155/7500-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.385A3 65.7229.200.00-003 65.7229.200.00CE003AN00097903 MDRS 155/7500-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.385A1,3 65.7229.410.00-001 65.7229.410.00CE001AN00097904 MDRS 155/7500-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.385A4 65.7229.410.00-002 65.7229.410.00CE002AN00097905 MDRS 155/7500-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.385A3 65.7229.410.00-003 65.7229.410.00CE003AN00097927 MDRS 155/8000-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.386A1 65.7228.400.00-001 65.7228.400.00CE001AN00097928 MDRS 155/8000-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.386A4 65.7228.400.00-002 65.7228.400.00CE002AN00097929 MDRS 155/8000-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.386A3 65.7228.400.00-003 65.7228.400.00CE003AN00097930 MDRS 155/8000-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.386A1 65.7228.410.00-001 65.7228.410.00CE001AN00097931 MDRS 155/8000-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.386A4 65.7228.410.00-002 65.7228.410.00CE002AN00097932 MDRS 155/8000-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.386A3 65.7228.410.00-003 65.7228.410.00CE003AN00090372 MDRS 155/13000-128 Rx-E ITU-R F.497 65.7222.400.00-001 65.7222.400.00CE001AN00090370 MDRS 155/13000-128 RxD-E ITU-R F.497 65.7222.410.00-001 65.7222.410.00CE001

OscillatorsAN00065971 Oscillator 3.6 GHz 3413-3771 65.7209.300.00-001 65.7209.300.00CEAN00074928 Oscillator 3.6 GHz 3610-3969 65.7209.300.00-030 65.7209.300.00CEAN00074088 Oscillator 3.9 GHz 3610-3969 65.7214.300.00-001 65.7214.300.00CEAN00075400 Oscillator 3.9 GHz 3413-3771 65.7214.300.00-054 65.7214.300.00CEAN00075396 Oscillator 3.9 GHz 3824-4190 65.7214.300.00-050 65.7214.300.00CEAN00065972 Oscillator 4.7 GHz 4430-4990 65.7210.300.00-001 65.7210.300.00CEAN00065974 Oscillator 6.2 GHz 5689-6152 65.7211.300.00-001 65.7211.300.00CEAN00087382 Oscillator 6.2 GHz 6197-6740 65.7211.300.00-034 65.7211.300.00CEAN00065975 Oscillator 6.8 GHz 6197-6740 65.7203.300.00-001 65.7203.300.00CEAN00075009 Oscillator 6.8 GHz 6800-7233 65.7203.300.00-016 65.7203.300.00CEAN00065976 Oscillator 7.5 GHz 6800-7233 65.7207.300.00-001 65.7207.300.00CEAN00076336 Oscillator 7.5 GHz 7428-7638 65.7207.300.00-058 65.7207.300.00CEAN00076337 Oscillator 7.5 GHz 7596-8388 65.7207.300.00-059 65.7207.300.00CEAN00065977 Oscillator 8.0 GHz 7596-8388 65.7208.300.00-001 65.7208.300.00CEAN00076375 Oscillator 8.0 GHz 8192-8468 65.7208.300.00-024 65.7208.300.00CEAN00093839 Oscillator 13.0 GHz 12765-12849 65.7222.300.00-006 65.7222.300.00CEAN00093844 Oscillator 13.0 GHz 12877-12961 65.7222.300.00-006 65.7222.300.00CEAN00093849 Oscillator 13.0 GHz 13031-13115 65.7222.300.00-011 65.7222.300.00CEAN00093854 Oscillator 13.0 GHz 13143-13227 65.7222.300.00-016 65.7222.300.00CE

Page 377: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Ordering Information

RF/160 OI 14-3

Ident. nos. Additional remarks Drawing nos. CE declarationnos.

MODEM unitAN00066372 Modem Shelf LH STM-1 65.7205.110.00-001 65.7205.110.00CE001AN00081127 SPI STM-1 EL Interface 65.7205.180.00-001 65.7205.180.00CE001AN00061295 SPI STM-1 OPT SCPC flat 1310nm 65.7205.130.00-001 65.7205.130.00CE001AN00090851 SPI STM-1 OPT DIN 47256 flat 1310nm 65.7205.130.00-002 65.7205.130.00CE002AN00090852 SPI STM-1 OPT EURO 2000 flat 1310nm 65.7205.130.00-003 65.7205.130.00CE003AN00061293 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Unit 65.7205.140.00-001 65.7205.140.00CE001AN00101380 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Unit 1+1 65.7205.140.00-002 65.7205.140.00CE002AN00061289 Controller Module 65.7205.170.00-001 65.7205.170.00CE001AN00061290 MU Power Supply 65.7205.185.00-001 65.7205.185.00CE001AN00061291 MD 155/140-64QAM Mod. 155/140-64 MLQAM 65.7205.150.00-001 65.7205.150.00CE001AN00061292 DM 155/140-64QAM Demod. 155/140-64 MLQAM 65.7205.155.00-001 65.7205.155.00CE001AN00094838 MD 155/140-128QAM Mod. 155/140-128QAM 65.7205.600.00-001 65.7205.600.00CE001AN00094840 DM 155/140-128QAM Demod. 155/140-128 MLQAM 65.7205.610.00-001 65.7205.610.00CE001AN00074027 RPSI STM-1 Interface 65.7205.125.00-001 65.7205.125.00CE001AN00066374 RPS-C max. 7+1 (N+1, N+2) 65.7205.500.00-001 65.7205.500.00CE001AN00066375 RPS-H Hot Standby 65.7205.505.00-001 65.7205.505.00CE001

OHA unitAN00066373 OHAU SHELF 65.7205.310.00-001 65.7205.310.00CE001AN00061300 SOH Access Module 65.7205.320.00-001 65.7205.320.00CE001AN00066371 SOH Ext. Module 65.7205.325.00-001 65.7205.325.00CE001AN00061298 RFCOH ACC.MODULE Module I; 4x64k, 2048k 65.7205.330.00-001 65.7205.330.00CE001AN00066370 RFCOH ACC.MODULE Module II 8x64k, 2048k 65.7205.330.00-002 65.7205.330.00CE002AN00061301 EOW Module 65.7205.340.00-001 65.7205.340.00CE001AN00213556 ECC Gateway 65.7205.350.00-001 65.7205.350.00CE001AN00096408 Handset OHAU W. plate (Western RJ11) 65.1415.675.00-001 Third-party productAN00037455 PSTN 1 PSTN 4W Public Subscr.

Term. Netw. 4W65.7186.342.00-001 65.7186.342.00CE001

AN00037456 PSTN 2 PSTN 6W Public Subscr.Term. Netw. 6W E+M

65.7186.344.00-001 65.7186.344.00CE001

AN00037458 ABZWEIG F1 EOW Branch. 3.Dir. Voice 65.7186.346.00-001 65.7186.346.00CE001AN00061297 SISA-0/N 65.7205.380.00-001 65.7205.380.00CE001AN00067840 QD2 Interface Module 65.7205.390.00-001 65.7205.390.00CE001AN00045958 SISA-K/2 RF 62.7032.400.00-001 62.7032.400.00CE001AN00061296 OHAU Power Supply 65.7205.370.00-001 65.7205.370.00CE001AN00219646 OHAU Power Supply when using ECC Gateway 65.7205.370.00-002 65.7205.370.00CE002

ManualsAN00096473 BHB DRS155/-64/128 Operating Manual, German 65.1220.000.10-001 not requiredAN00096474 OM DRS155/-64/128 Operating Manual, English 65.1220.000.15-001 not requiredAN00098321 MO DRS155/64/128ES Operating Manual, Spanish 65.1220.000.16-001 not requiredAN00098322 OM DRS155/64/128RU Operating Manual, Russian 65.1220.000.17-001 not requiredAN00109016 IHB DRS155/64/128 Com. Man., German 65.1220.000.35-001 not requiredAN00109014 CM DRS155/64/128 Com. Man., Englsh 65.1220.000.30-001 not requiredAN10609477 DRS155/...-64/128 Install. Man., German 15.8565.004.00-001 not required

SoftwareAN00069388 DRS 155 E GER (LMT) Applic. Softw., Ger. 65.7206.400.00-001 not requiredAN00069389 DRS 155 E ENG (LMT) Applic. Softw., Engl. 65.7206.410.00-001 not required

Page 378: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Ordering Information Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI14-4

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 379: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions After-Sales Service

RF/160 OI 15-1

15 After-Sales Service

Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH are maintenance-free.

If not otherwise agreed upon by contract, equipment repairs are limited to the replacement ofcomplete modules. After exchanging faulty units, it must be ensured that the software versions of thenew units are compatible with those of the system software releases previously used. For thispurpose, a software download might be necessary.

As far as there are no other contractual regulations, please send defective modules to the followingaddress:

Marconi Communications GmbHCentral Europe Repair Management

Robert-Bosch-Str.10

01454 Radeberg

Germany

Repair Management(during normal service hours)

Tel.: + 49 3528 / 456 - 267 or - 583

Fax: +49 3528 / 456 534

Front Line Support (FLS)

Call numbers:(24h/7D)

Tel.: 08000 / 6272664

Fax: 0800 / 1812275

Page 380: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Ordering Information Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI15-2

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Page 381: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI 16-1

16 Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

Page 382: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI16-2

Page 383: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI 16-3

Page 384: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI16-4

Page 385: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI 16-5

Page 386: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI16-6

Page 387: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI 16-7

Page 388: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI16-8

Page 389: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-1

17 Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model17.1 QD2 viewAt QD2 level, a microwave radio station is presented as SISA-V with its lower-order network elementsMDRS 155 E and XQI.A MDRS 155 E network element always consists of a microwave radio terminal with a radio directionand a line direction. Regenerator stations are composed of two microwave radio terminalsinterconnected on the line side via baseband interfaces. In this case, two MDRS 155 E networkelements (WEST and EAST) are required.

DRS155E XQI DRS155E DRS155E XQI

SISA-V SISA-V

Fig. 17-1: QD2 view of a microwave radio terminal (left) or regenerator station (right)

The following figure shows an example of the functional groups of a MDRS 155 E network elementwith and without line protection.

Fig. 17-2: MDRS 155 E-2+0(left) and 1+1conf. with occasional traffic (right)

SISA0 SCU

RTF-1or

RTFE-1RRTF-1

RX

TX

RTF-1or

RTFE-1RRTF-1

RX

TX

OP1

OP2RTF-1or

RTFE-1RRTF-1

RX

TX

PR1

RTF-1or

RTFE-1RRTF-1

RX

TX

OP1

SISA0 SCUPSU

Page 390: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-2

17.2 Functional groups supported

Functional group Abbreviation Meaning

SISA0 SISA0 Monitoring and station monitoring data

Regenerator Transport FunctionSTM-1 RTF-1 Optical baseband port STM-1 with Regenerator

Section Termination

Regenerator Transport FunctionElectrical STM-1 RTFE-1 Electrical baseband port STM-1 with Regenerator

Section Termination

Radio Relay Transport FunctionSTM-1 RRTF-1 Radio-side Regenerator Section Termination

Receiver RX

Contains the data of the incoming radio signal, butis not identical with a physical receiver!With equipment protection, RX also controls andmonitors the receive-side protection switchingprocesses.

Transmitter TX

Contains the data of the outgoing radio signal, butis not identical with a physical transmitter!With equipment protection, TX also controls andmonitors the transmit-side protection switchingprocesses.

Protection Switching Unit PSUControls and monitors the protection switchingprocesses in case of microwave radio systems withline protection.

Service Channel Unit SCU Monitoring of RF service channels

Signalling Unit (Melde Einheit) ME5 Monitoring of signalling inputs (XQI)

17.3 Assignment of instances to microwave radio channelsFor the functional groups RX, TX, RTF-1, RTFE-1 and RRTF-1, the following assignment of functionalunit instances to microwave radio channels is applicable:

Microwave radio channel Functional unit instanceOP1...OP16 1...16PR1 17PR2 18

For the SISA0 and PSU functional groups, there is only instance 1.

SCU functional group: See chapter 17.13 .

5 Within the XQI network element

Page 391: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-3

17.4 SISA0 functional group

17.4.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneousmessage (event)

Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority6 X X X

Date/Time -- X X

User data X X X

Software version -- X --

System configuration7 X X --

Service ID X X X

Reset X -- X

Operational status X X X

Filetransfer download -- X X

Equipment with modules -- X --

Reference list -- X --

Alarm list -- X --

Nominal/actual equipment X X X

17.4.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A CONF

Monitoring disturbed (HW) X

Monitoring disturbed (SW) X

Impermissible configuration X

Actual equipment is not incompliance with specifications

X

6 The alarm priority can be set, but will not be active.7 Simple configuration (MDRS155 Terminal NE)

Page 392: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-4

17.5 RTF-1 functional group

17.5.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneousmessage (event)

Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Current performance values -- X --

15-min. performance values -- X --

24-h performance values -- X --

Parameterization ofperformance measuring points

X X X

Operational status X X X

User data X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.5.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Power ICN LOS LOF SD Lpow.Low

SPIO module defective X

Power supply module MUPSdefective

X X

Loop switching or B1 inversionin the DPU module

X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

LASER transmit failure X

Loss of baseband input signal X

Loss of sync (STM-1) X

Degradation of BB input signal(BER>2E-05)

X

Page 393: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-5

17.5.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

ALS Laser safety shutdown <available / not available> r

TXcmd Transmitter <ON / OFF>Laser control

r

B1invertTx B1 byte <inverted / not inverted> on Tx sideB1 byte inversion in line direction

r/w

17.5.4 Performance measuring points

Measuring point Description

1 Regenerator Section (BB incoming)

17.5.5 User data

Block no. Description

2 ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in DPU module

Page 394: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-6

17.6 RTFE-1 functional group

17.6.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneousmessage (event)

Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Current performance values -- X --

15-min. performance values -- X --

24-h performance values -- X --

Parameterization ofperformance measuring points

X X X

Operational status X X X

User data X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.6.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Power Timing ICN LOS LOF SD

SPIE module defective X X

Power supply module MUPSdefective

X X

Loop switching or B1 inversionin the DPU module

X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

Loss of baseband input signal X

Loss of sync (STM-1) X

Degradation of BB input signal(BER>2E-05)

X

Page 395: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-7

17.6.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

B1invertTx B1 byte <inverted / not inverted> on Tx sideB1 byte inversion in line direction

r/w

17.6.4 Performance measuring points

Measuring point Description

1 Regenerator Section (BB incoming)

17.6.5 User data

Block no. Description

2 ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in the DPU module

Page 396: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-8

17.7 RRTF-1 functional group

17.7.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneousmessage (event)

Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Current performance values -- X --

15-min. performance values -- X --

24-h performance values -- X --

Parameterization ofperformance measuring points

X X X

Operational status X X X

User data X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.7.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Power ICN LOF SD

DPU module defective ordisturbed

X

Power supply module MUPSdefective

X X

Loop switching or B1 inversionin the DPU module

X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

Loss of sync (STM-1 orRFCOH)

X

Degradation of STM1 signalreceived (BER>2E-05)

X

Page 397: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-9

17.7.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

B1invertTx B1 byte <inverted / not inverted> on Tx sideB1 byte inversion in radio direction

r/w

17.7.4 Performance measuring points

Measuring point Description

1 Regenerator Section (from radio direction)

17.7.5 User data

Block no. Description

2 ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in the TX module

3 ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in the RX module

Page 398: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-10

17.8 RX functional group

17.8.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Measuring value X X --

Measuring value thresholds X X X

Operational status X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.8.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Timing ICN LOS MIS-ID XPIC

DEMOD module defective X

Receiver modules RX, RXDIVor RXOSC defective

X

Power supply module MUPSdefective

X

DEMOD module faulty X

Receiver modules RX, RXDIVor RXOSC faulty

X

Clock recovery problem in theDEMOD module

X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

No valid IF input signal at theDEMOD module

X

No valid combiner input signalat X23 and X24 of diversityreceiver

X

Loss of RF receive signal X

Receive signal includes wrongradio hop identifier

X

XPIC function disturbed inDEMOD

X

Loss of sync of Rx oscillators X

Page 399: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-11

17.8.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

IDExpect Radio hop identifier <0...15>Expected radio hop identifier

r

Protection Redundancy <none / equipment protection> r

17.8.4 Measuring values

Measuring point Parameter measured Unit Resolution

1 Maximum Rx levelin diversity mode (PMain , PDiversity)

dBm 0.01 dBm

2 AGC voltage LO V 10 mV

5 Opening of eye pattern - I-channel % 1

6 Opening of eye pattern - Q-channel % 1

11 Difference between Rx levels | PMain – PDiversity | dB 1

Page 400: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-12

17.9 RX functional group for hot standby configurationsIn the following sections, "A" is used for transmission path 1 (OP) and "B" for transmission path 2(PR).

17.9.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Measuring value X X --

Measuring value thresholds X X X

Operational status X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.9.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Timing ICN LOS MIS-ID XPIC

Fault in path A AND B X

Fault EITHER in path A OR B X

Failure of the RPSH module X

Clock recovery problem inDEMOD A OR B

X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

LOS in path A AND B X

Receive signal includes wrongradio hop identifier

X

XPIC function in DEMOD AOR B faulty

X

Loss of sync of Rx oscillatorsA OR B

X

Description LOSA LOSB RXA RXB Threshold Switch

LOS in path A X X

LOS in path B X X

Fault or failure in A X

Fault or failure in B X

Failure in RPSH module X

Number of protectionswitchover processesexceeded threshold

X

Page 401: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-13

17.9.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

IDExpect Radio hop identifier <0...15>Expected radio hop identifier

r

Protection Redundancy <none / equipment protection> r

ActivRX Active receiver <A / B> r/w

Auto Automatic protection switching <ON / OFF> r/w

Threshold Alarm threshold <0 ... 65535>Threshold for the number of automatic protection switchingprocesses within one 15-min. interval

r/w

17.9.4 Measuring values

Measuring point Parameter measured Unit Resolution

1 Maximum receive level in path Ain diversity mode (PMain , PDiversity)

dBm 0.01 dBm

2 AGC voltage LO in path A V 10 mV

3 Maximum receive level in path Bin diversity mode (PMain , PDiversity)

dBm 0.01 dBm

4 AGC voltage LO in path B V 10 mV

5 Opening of eye pattern, I-channel, A % 1

6 Opening of eye pattern, Q-channel, A % 1

7 Opening of eye pattern, I-channel, B % 1

8 Opening of eye pattern, Q-channel, B % 1

11 Difference between Rx levels | PMain – PDiversity |, A dB 1

12 Difference between Rx levels | PMain – PDiversity |, B dB 1

Page 402: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-14

17.10 TX functional group

17.10.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Measuring value X X --

Measuring value thresholds X X X

Operational status X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.10.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Timing ICN LOSA

MOD module defective X

MOD module disturbed X X

Transmitter modules TX orTXOSC defective

X

No valid IF input signal attransmitter input X2

X X

Power supply module MUPSdefective

X

Transmitter modules TX orTXOSC disturbed

X

Clock problem in MOD module X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

No valid IF input signal atDEMOD

X

Page 403: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-15

17.10.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

IDSend Radio hop identifier <0...15>Radio hop identifier to the sent

r

Protection Redundancy <none / equipment protection> r

17.10.4 Measuring values

Measuring point Parameter measured Unit Resolution

1 Transmit level dBm 0.01 dBm

2 Transmit level AGC voltage V 10 mV

3 AGC voltage LO V 10 mV

Page 404: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-16

17.11 TX functional group for equipment protection (hot standby)

In the following sections, "A" is used for transmission path 1 (OP) and "B" for transmission path 2(PR).

17.11.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Measuring value X X --

Measuring value thresholds X X X

Operational status X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.11.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Power Timing ICN LOSA

Defect in path A AND B X

Defect in the active Tx path X

Defect in the non-active Txpath

X

Failure in path A OR B X

Power supply defectiveEITHER in A OR B

X

Clock problem in MOD A orMOD B

X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

No valid IF input signal attransmitter input X2 A

X

Description LOSB Threshold TXA TXB Switch

No valid IF input signal attransmitter input X2 B

X

Number of switchover processesexceeded threshold

X

Failure or defect in path A X

Failure or defect in path B X

Failure or defect in RPSH module X

Switch position on faulty Tx path X

Page 405: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-17

17.11.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

IDSend Radio hop identifier <0...15>Expected radio hop identifier

r

Protection Redundancy <none / equipment protection> r

ActivTX Active transmitter <A / B> r/w

Auto Automatic switchover <ON / OFF> r/w

Threshold Alarm threshold value <0 ... 65535>Threshold for the max. number of automatic protection switchingprocesses within one 15-min. interval

r/w

17.11.4 Measuring values

Measuring point Parameter measured Unit Resolution

1 Transmit level, transmitter A dBm 0.01 dBm

2 Tx level AGC voltage, transmitter A V 10 mV

3 AGC voltage LO, transmitter A V 10 mV

4 Transmit level, transmitter B dBm 0.01 dBm

5 Tx level AGC voltage, transmitter B V 10 mV

6 AGC voltage LO, transmitter B V 10 mV

Page 406: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-18

17.12 PSU functional group

17.12.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Sampling parameters X X X

Current performance values -- X --

15-min. performance values -- X --

24-h performance values -- X --

Parameterization ofperformance measuring points

X X X

Operational status X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.12.2 Alarm information

Description INT-A8 INT-B Power ICN OCH x TCH x

Defect or failure of a RPSCmodule

X

Failure of CAN buscommunication

X

No valid OPx input signal fromPR (Rx direction)

X

No valid PR input signal fromOPx (Tx direction)

X

Alignment error in OPx X

Defect of a MUPS module X X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

OP x cannot be protection-switched automatically, sincethere is not free PR.

X

Max. number of automatic OPxprotection switching processesexceeded the threshold in thelast 15-min. interval.

X

8 Not supported in "1+1 without occasional traffic" configurations

Page 407: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-19

17.12.3 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

ReceptionFD_BKx

Diversity (receiver) <ON/OFF>OPx works with/without frequency diversity on Rx side.

r

Priority BKx Priority (receiver) <A / B>In case of automatic protection switching, OPx is treated withhigh/low priority.

r/w

Auto BKx Automatic (receiver) <ON / OFF>In case of a failure, OPx is switched over automatically / lockedout of protection.

r/w

Reception BAx Setting (receiver) <Normal / EK1 / EK2>Baseband port OPx is connected to OPx / PR1 / PR2 on Rx side.

r/w

TransmissionFD_BKx

Diversity (transmitter) <ON / OFF>OPx works with/without frequency diversity on Tx side.

r

TransmissionBAx

Graphical display with connecting linesBaseband port OPx is connected to OPx / PRy on Tx side.

r

EK y impl PRy available / not available r

OT CmdReception EKy

OT command (Receiver) <disabled.../loose.../fixed>Occasional traffic option for PRy disabled / loose / fixed.

r/w

OT statusReception EKy

OT command (Receiver) <none.../loose.../fixed>Occasional traffic option for PRy disabled / loose / fixed on Rxside.

r

OT statusTransmissionEKy

OT command (Transmitter) <none.../loose.../fixed>Occasional traffic option for PRy disabled / loose / fixed on Txside.

r

17.12.4 Performance measuring points

Measuring point Description

1 Number of automatic Rx-side protection switching processes for OP 1

...

14 Number of automatic Rx-side protection switching processes for OP 14

Page 408: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-20

17.13 SCU functional group

17.13.1 Mapping service channels onto SCU instances and channels

Microwave terminals are configured as network elements WEST. Regenerator stations are alwayscomposed of two terminal network elements, i.e. one NE WEST and one NE EAST.All service channels, except those of RFCOH East, are mapped into SCU instances of networkelement WEST. The instance no. itself depends on the address of the associated OHA Unit in thesystem.The distinction between "East“ and "West“ for service channels is independent of the network elementand indicates the direction of the service channel signals within one terminal, "West“ being the radiodirection (from/to the radio hop) and "East" being the line direction (from/ the baseband interface).

OHAUaddress

NE WESTService channel direction

"East"

NE WESTService channel direction

"West"

NE EASTService channeldirection "East"

1 SCU OP1 SCU OP2 SCU OP1

2 SCU OP3 SCU OP4 SCU OP3

3 SCU OP5 SCU OP6 SCU OP5

4 SCU OP7 SCU OP8 SCU OP7

SCUchannel

SCU OP[1,3,5,7]NE WEST

SCU OP[2,4,6,8]NE WEST

SCU OP[1,3,5,7]NE EAST

1 SOHA, DSC1-4 East SOHA, DSC1-4 West --

2 SOHA, E1 East SOHA, E1 West --

3 SOHA, F1 East SOHA, F1 West --

4 SOHA, WSC East OP SOHA, WSC West OP --

5 SOHA, WSC East PR SOHA, WSC West PR --

6 -- RFCOH West, DSC1-4 RFCOH East, DSC1-4

7 -- RFCOH West, DSC5-8 RFCOH East, DSC5-8

8 -- RFCOH West, WSC OP RFCOH East, WSC OP

9 -- RFCOH West, WSC PR RFCOH East, WSC PR

10 -- -- --

11 SOHEXT, E2 East OP SOHEXT, E2 West OP --

12 SOHEXT, E2 East PR SOHEXT, E2 West PR --

13 SOHEXT, DCC East OP SOHEXT, DCC West OP --

14 SOHEXT, DCC East PR SOHEXT, DCC West PR --

Page 409: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

RF/160 OI 17-21

17.13.2 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Configuration X X X

Sampling parameters X X X

Operational status X X X

Reference list -- X --

17.13.3 Alarm information

Description INT-A INT-B Power ICN 1 ... 14

Defect of one of the modulesassigned to the respectiveSCU

X

Failure of one of the modulesassigned to the respectiveSCU

X

Defect of the OHAUPS module X

Communication failure on theinternal LON bus

X

Failure of the associatedservice channel

X

17.13.4 Configuration

Configuration SOA view Status

SCx implx = 1 ... 14

Service channel x is used <Listbox active / not active (dimmed)>The assigned service channel can be transmitted / cannot betransmitted.

r

SCx usedx = 1 ... 14

Service channel x is used <yes / no >AIS monitoring for service channel SCx is active / not active.

r

Page 410: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI17-22

17.14 ME functional group

17.14.1 Application functions

Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information X X --

Alarm disabling and priority X X X

Sampling parameters X X X

Configuration X X X

Operational status X X X

User data X X X

17.14.2 GeneralThe unit supports eight input channels whose polarity (active high/low) can be configured individually.

Page 411: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC

RF/160 OI 18-1

18 Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC18.1 GeneralThe present chapter describes the behaviour of MDRS 155 E systems in co-channel operation oncrossed polarizations (CCDP mode) in case of equipment failures.

18.2 Functioning of a CCDP systemFig. 18-1 shows a simplified block diagram of a CCDP microwave radio system. The transmitters "TxH" and "Tx V“ transmit two independent (STM-1) data signals with the same frequency on crossedpolarizations (H = horizontal, V = vertical). In the transmission channel, the signals are time-variablyand frequency-selectively distorted on the respective polarization due to fading. This is shown in thebelow block diagram by the Hhh(f) and Hvv(f) filter functions. In the CCDP mode, there are additionalcross-talk components between the two polarizations shown by the Hvh(f) and Hhv(f) functions.

Fig. 18-1: Block diagram of a CCDP system

On the Rx side, the signals are first passing the receivers "Rx H“ and "Rx V“. With the ATPC(Automatic Transmit Power Control) circuit activated, the transmitter output levels are controlled toobtain a constant Rx power. In normal operation, the control circuits on both polarizations workindependently of each other.The downstream demodulators represent a simulation of the transmission channel used tocompensate the signal distortions which are occurring on the latter. The adaptive channel equalizer(ATDE = Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer) compensates the linear distortions of the signals on thetwo polarizations. The frequency-selective cross-talk components between the two polarizations areeliminated by the cross-polarization equalizer (XPE).

18.3 Behaviour in case of radio hop failuresIn an undisturbed transmission channel, the four channel transmission functions shown in Fig. 18-1are constant irrespective of the frequency used. Hhh(f) and Hvv(f) represent the respective radio hopattenuation. The cross-talk components Hvh(f) and Hhv(f) correspond to the cross-polarizationdiscrimination (XPD) of the antenna and are typically 35 dB. Under these circumstances, systemsoperating with 64 MLQAM and 128 MLQAM modulation permit an error-free transmission of the datasignals even without the XPE function.

Page 412: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI18-2

Radio hop failures are in most cases caused by fading effects. These are normally composed of afrequency-independent increase in the radio hop attenuation (flat fading) and a frequency-selectiveattenuation (selective fading). These flat fading portions in the two polarization planes arecompensated by the ATPC circuit and a control amplifier in the receiver. The fading events on therespective polarization plane are accompanied by depolarization effects which are normally alsofrequency selective. The adaptive filters (ATDE and XPE) in the demodulators are used tocompensate these distortion and cross-talk effects.The fading events on the individual polarization planes and the associated depolarization effects arecorrelated with respect to each other. However, the interference factors are so manifold that a generalstatement regarding the correlation strength is not possible. In order to permit the maximum protectionfor any channel situation, the various adaptive filters and ATPC circuits must operate independently ofeach other in the distorted channel.In contrast to the equipment failures described in section 18.4, fading effects do not occur suddently,but slowly. The control circuits of the ATPC, receiver, channel and cross-polarization equalizer aredesigned and adapted to each other so that they can follow the highest radio hop dynamics to beexpected without any delay.The adaptive channel filters are able to equalize selective fading events and the associated cross-polar cross-talk effects up to the limits specified by the signatures. Fading parameters exceedingthese limiting values lead to an increase in the bit error ratio up to a level, which exceeds the SESthreshold as defined by ITU-T Rec. G.826 and results in a failure of the synchronization devices. Inthis case, the DPU module injects an AIS into the corresponding STM-1 signals.

18.4 Behaviour in case of equipment failuresDue to the relatively strong cross-polar coupling, failures occurring in a channel of the CCDP systemmay affect the transmission on the crossed polarization. In this conjunction, equipment failures areparticularly critical, since they normally occur spontaneously, whereas the contol circuitscompensating such effects cannot react without delay.In CCDP systems with cross-polarization equalizers there is a basic difference between equipmentfaults on the transmit side and those on the receive side. The following sections describe theconsequences of such events and the corresponding system reactions.

18.4.1 Tx-side failureFig. 18-2 shows the situation of an equipment failure on the Tx side, which occurred on the verticalpolarization in the example depicted below. This leads not only to a transmission failure on the verticalpolarization, but also to a breakdown of the interference coupling from the vertical to the horizontalpolarization. However, in this case, signal energy is still flowing in the opposite direction (H to V). Evenin case of a high XPD factor, this energy is normally sufficient for the receiver RxV and thedownstream signal processing units to synchronize themselves to the signal radiated in the horizontalpolarization plane and to regenerate it without any bit errors.

Fig. 18-2: Equipment failure on the transmit side (V)

Page 413: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Operating Instructions Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC

RF/160 OI 18-3

In STM-1 signals, a polarization identifier is transmitted in addition to the radio hop identifier. Usingthis information under the fault conditions described, the system can identify a synchronization to thecross-polar data signal. The corresponding alarm is displayed by the DPU/RPS STM-1 module asradio hop ID alarm. It causes both cross-polarization equalizers, XPEhv and XPEvh, to be switched off,so that there can be no more overcouplings on the XPE paths. In consequence of the radio hop IDalarm, the DPU module of the vertical polarization plane injects AIS into the STM-1 signal transmittedin the line direction. The disconnection of the cross-polarization equalizers is signalled in thedemodulator module as "XPIC not in operation" alarm.As soon as the faulty transmitter (V) is operational again, the system automatically returns to normaloperation.In case of a strong cross-polar coupling in the transmission channel, a spontaneous equipment failureon the Tx side can lead to short-term transmission failures on the crossed polarization, since theinternal control loops cannot react to the sudden change in the transmission parameters without delay.

18.4.2 Rx-side failureThe behaviour of the MDRS155 E systems in case of an equipment failure on the Rx side stronglydepends on which components are affected. The worst case occurs in case of a failure in the RFpreamplifier section, while all other circuits continue to operate correctly. Fig. 18-3 shows the situationresulting from such a failure.

Fig. 18-3: Equipment failure on the receive side (V)

In the RxV receiver, an insufficient level is detected. If the ATPC circuit is active, the signal power ofthe TxV transmitter is increased up to its maximum value (e.g. 30.5 dBm), whereas the power of thehorizonal channel, i.e. of the undisturbed transmission channel, remains at its minimum value (e.g.10.5 dBm). The XPD in the horizontal channel deteriorates by the difference between the two transmitlevels, i.e. it is reduced in the present example from 35 dB (typical antenna XPD) to 15 dB.For 64 MLQAM and 128 MLQAM transmission, this S/N ratio is not sufficient for a correct datatransmission without XPIC. Simultaneously, it is no longer possible to compensate the cross-talkeffects Hhv(f) from the vertical to the horizontal polarization in the demodulator, since thecompensation path XPEhv is affected by the interrupted signal transmission.The faulty RxV receiver continues to control its output level to the nominal value. The signal, however,contains only noise. The control loops in the demodulator of the vertical polarization cannotsynchronize themselves any more to a modulation signal. This results in a shutdown of both XPEfilters. Thus, it is prevented that the receiver noise is transferred via the XPIC to the undisturbedchannel and that its signal quality is additionally affected.As soon as the demodulator can no longer synchronize, a timer is started in the receiver. The runtimeof this timer can be adjusted in the Hardware View of the MSP in the "Main Receiver“ module underthe "Error timer" configuration option. After expiry of the timer, the transmit level is controlled to a value

Page 414: 19089-LZN7080141_4Uen.Aradiorelee marconi8r

Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI18-4

defined for this fault condition. This value must be adjusted in the Configuration window under the "Txlevel after error timer has expired/Manual Tx level" menu item.

Using these settings, the transmitter of the faulty channel can be reduced to its mininum level aftertimer expiry. Thus, the S/N ratio in the channel not affected by the equipment failure can be improvedand bit-error-free transmission can be restored with a radio channel not affected by fading events andantennas with a sufficient XPD factor.The following settings are recommended for the ATPC timer and Tx level under fault conditions:� Error timer = 4 min.� Tx level after error timer has expired/Manual Tx level = minimum value

Reason:The required availability of 99.999% corresponds to an outage of 5.25 min./per year. This outage iscomposed of a number of short failures (due to events occurring on the radio hop such as fading orprecipitation). It is not expected that a single event could already last for this entire permissible outage.Thus, when entering 4 min. as default value, it should still be possible to distinguish between failuresdue to fading and failures due to equipment defects. However, the selection of a value <4 min. canlead to a longer outage in case of failures caused by fading effects, since in this case, the Tx level willpossibly be reduced before the fading event disappears. This would result in an additionaldeterioration of the S/N ratio.

18.4.3 Failure of the ATPC control channelIn case of a transmission failure in the return direction, the ATPC control information of the TxH andTxV transmitters will get lost (see Fig. 18-1). The system behaviour in this case can be configured inthe Hardware View of the MSP in the "Transmitter" module under the "ATPC fault processing" menuitem.If the "XPIC dependence" option is active, both transmitters operating at the same frequency and oncrossed polarizations, are simultaneously controlled up to their maximum output level, as soon as atleast one of the two ATPC control channels fails. If this option is not active, only the transmitteraffected by the control channel failure will be controlled up to its maximum level, while the transmitteron the crossed polarization will continue to operate normally.

In the CCDP mode, it is recommended to activate the "ATPC dependence" option.

As soon as the ATPC control channel fails, a timer is started in the transmitter. The runtime of thistimer is adjustable via the "Error timer“ option. After expiry of this timer, the transmitter affected by thecontrol channel failure is controlled to the value adjusted in the same configuration window under the"Tx level after error timer has expired" option. At the same time, the transmitter not affected by thecontrol channel failure returns to normal operation (provided that the "XPIC dependence" option hasbeen activated).It is recommended to made the settings as described in section 18.4.2, i.e.� Error timer = 4 min� Tx level after error timer expiry = minimum value

For reasons why these settings should be made, see section 18.4.2.

This system behaviour is primarily based on the assumption that the ATPC control channel has beeninterrupted in the return direction due to strong fading effects, so that no information on the Tx powerrequired is available. In order to avoid negative effects on the go direction, the power of the transmitteraffected is increased up to its maximum value. Simultaneously, the cross-polar transmitter iscontrolled up to its maximum transmit power (XPIC dependence = ON), since the cross-polar S/N ratioin this channel would otherwise deteriorate by the ATPC control range. Thus, it is possible to createthe best prerequisites to maintain the availability of the transmission link in the undisturbed directioneven in case of fading effects eventually occurring.After expiry of the timer it is assumed that not a fading event, but an equipment failure has led to theinterruption of the control channel. In this case, it is reasonable to control down the transmitter to itsminiumum output level in order to minimize the noise level affecting the transmission channels stilloperational.